礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在《长部》中· 《大品复注》巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Dīghanikāye · Mahāvaggaṭīkā
1. 大本经复注
266 段
《大本经》的注释巴利
1. Mahāpadānasuttavaṇṇanā
与宿住有关的讲述注释巴利
Pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttakathāvaṇṇanā
1 就像自然长成的迦利罗树,茂密的枝叶与树冠层层覆盖,形成像帐篷一样遮蔽的空间,这个地方就被叫作“迦利罗圆亭”。“在门口”指的是在门附近。由于树站在门边,别的地方也同样用这个名称;为说明这一点,才说了“就像”等话。那么,世尊当时为什么不住在大香殿,而住在迦利罗小屋里呢?为了说明那间小屋也正是佛陀世尊居住的香殿,才说了“在祇园内”等话。“萨罗罗叶屋”就是用天木树建造的房子。“常食之后”是指比丘们日常吃饭的时间之后,也就是正午过后。“从团食返回”是指已经离开团食、吃完饭的人。因此说了“食事”等内容。巴利
1. Yathājātānaṃ karerirukkhānaṃ ghanapattasākhāviṭapehi maṇḍapasaṅkhepehi sañchanno padeso ‘‘karerimaṇḍapo’’ti adhippeto. Dvāreti dvārasamīpe. Dvāre ṭhitarukkhavasena aññatthāpi samaññā atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ pana bhagavā mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃ avasitvā tadā karerikuṭikāyaṃ vihāsīti? Sāpi buddhassa bhagavato vasanagandhakuṭi evāti dassento ‘‘antojetavane’’tiādimāha. Salaḷāgāranti devadārurukkhehi katagehaṃ. Pakatibhattassa pacchatoti bhikkhūnaṃ pākatikabhattakālato pacchā, ṭhitamajjhanhikato uparīti attho. Piṇḍapātato paṭikkantānanti piṇḍapātabhojanato apetānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhattakicca’’ntiādi.
按照圆形样式、以亭子的略称而建的坐堂,被称为“圆亭”,所以说“在坐堂中”。在“宿住相应”里,“宿”这个词指的是过去的时间范围,“住”这个词是业作名词。离开了蕴,并没有另外的所住之法,而蕴也只是依相续而运转,所以说“以过去所住蕴的相续,称为宿住”。“结合”是指以所缘的方式结合。“说示了”就是已经讲说了。因为与法相关联、不离开法,所以叫“有法的”;因此说“与法相应”。巴利
Maṇḍalasaṇṭhānā māḷasaṅkhepena katā nisīdanasālā ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷa’’nti adhippetāti āha ‘‘nisīdanasālāyā’’ti. Pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttāti ettha pubba-saddo atītavisayo, nivāsa-saddo kammasādhano, khandhavinimutto ca nivasitadhammo natthi, khandhā ca santānavaseneva pavattantīti āha ‘‘pubbenivutthakkhandhasantānasaṅkhātena pubbenivāsenā’’ti. Yojetvāti visayabhāvena yojetvā. Pavattitāti kathitā. Dhammūpasaṃhitattā dhammato anapetāti dhammī. Tenāha ‘‘dhammasaṃyuttā’’ti.
“生起了”是抽出来单独说的词,它和“已生起的、已出生的”这句话相连。不过,这种生起的方式在经文里只是简略地显示出来,为了详细说明,才开始讲“啊,真是稀有”等等。其中,“哪些人随念、哪些人不随念”这两句里,先说的那一句有详细铺陈,不是另一句,这正是按人的类别、时间的划分、随念的方式、以及比喻来分别说明,所以说了“外道们随念”等等。“达到最高业说者”,是指在业论上达到顶点的人,也就是安住在“有业,有业的果报”这种“业属于自己”的智见中的苦行者和游方者。他们只随念四十劫,因为世尊在《梵网经》等经中就是这样限定而说的。他们不能随念超过四十劫,既是因为有这样的教说,也是因为他们被恶见所覆盖,智慧本身相当薄弱。巴利
Udapādīti paduddhāro, tassa uppannā jātāti iminā sambandho. Taṃ panassā uppannākāraṃ pāḷiyaṃ saṅkhepatova dassitaṃ, vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘aho acchariya’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ke anussaranti, ke nānussarantīti padadvaye paṭhamaṃyeva sappapañcanaṃ, na itaranti tadeva puggalabhedato, kālavibhāgato, anussaraṇākārato, opammato niddisantena ‘‘titthiyā anussarantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aggappattakammavādinoti sikhāppattakammavādino ‘‘atthi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.234) evaṃ kammassakatāñāṇe ṭhitā tāpasaparibbājakā. Cattālīsaṃyeva kappe anussarantīti brahmajālādīsu (dī. ni. 1.33) bhagavatā tathā paricchijja vuttattā. Tato paraṃ na anussarantīti tathāvacanañca diṭṭhigatopaṭṭhakassa tesaṃ ñāṇassa paridubbalabhāvato.
所谓“声闻”,指的是大弟子,因为他们早在十万劫之前就已经发下大愿。普通声闻能够随念的劫数则比这更少。因为按照时间顺序,上首弟子和独觉佛修积福德与智慧的广大发愿,以及声闻菩提和独觉菩提的巴拉密资粮,其量被说为“一阿僧祇劫加十万劫,以及两阿僧祇劫加十万劫”,所以经文才说“两位上首弟子……乃至十万劫”。如果这些圣者们神通智慧的范围,是由他们积聚菩提资粮的时间长短来决定的,那么照这样推下去,连诸佛的智慧也会被限定出界限来。为了回应这种责难,所以说:“然而,诸佛并没有‘只有这么多’的界限,他们想随念多少,就能随念多少。”正如经文所说:“所知有多少,智慧就有多少。”因为就像佛陀的一切知智一样,诸佛的各种神通智慧,在自己的对象范围内根本没有固定的界限。因此,他们想了解什么,就能如实知道什么。或者也可以说:即使时间上似乎有界限,但由于大菩提资粮中悲心、善巧方便、摄受众生等力量格外殊胜,这是慧巴拉密威力展现出来的作用,它本身就没有界限,更何况由它所引生的那些神通智慧呢?巴利
Sāvakāti mahāsāvakā tesañhi kappasatasahassaṃ pubbābhinīhāro. Pakatisāvakā pana tato ūnakameva anussaranti. Yasmā ‘‘kappānaṃ lakkhādhikaṃ ekaṃ, dve ca asaṅkhyeyyānī’’ti kālavasena evaṃ parimāṇo yathākkamaṃ aggasāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ puññañāṇābhinīhāro, sāvakabodhipaccekabodhipāramitāsambharaṇañca, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dve aggasāvakā…pe… kappasatasahassañcā’’ti. Yadi bodhisambhārasambharaṇakālaparicchinno tesaṃ tesaṃ ariyānaṃ abhiññāñāṇavibhavo, evaṃ sante buddhānampissa saparicchedatā āpannāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana ettakanti paricchedo natthi, yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhanti, tāvatakaṃ anussarantī’’ti ‘‘yāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3, 5) vacanato. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya hi buddhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānampi savisaye paricchedo nāma natthi, tasmā yaṃ yaṃ ñātuṃ icchanti, te taṃ taṃ jānanti eva. Atha vā satipi kālaparicchede karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahādinā sātisayattā mahābodhisambhārānaṃ paññāpāramitāya pavattiānubhāvassa paricchedo nāma natthi, kuto tannimittakānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhānaṃ…pe… natthī’’ti.
“蕴的次第”是指诸蕴随因缘依次生起的先后顺序。“蕴的转起”是指受等诸蕴的生起。对他们来说,把握领受等行相更为殊胜;当他们以随念的方式在各处逐步推进时,在一有中得不到这种把握,所以说“看不见”——就像落入网中的鸟,或像鱼一样,这就是这段话的用意。“如钝”是指像迟钝的人。“如跛”是指像靠凳子才能行走的人。“执取见”是指执取无因生的见解。“杖端行”是指不脱离蕴的次第,就像靠着杖端引导而行。巴利
Khandhapaṭipāṭiyāti yathāpaccayaṃ anupubbapavattamānānaṃ khandhānaṃ anupubbiyā. Khandhappavattinti vedanādikkhandhappavattiṃ. Tesañhi anubhavanādiākāraggahaṇamassa sātisayaṃ, taṃ saññābhave tattha tattha anussaraṇavasena gahetvā gacchantā ekavokārabhave alabhantā ‘‘na passantī’’ti vuttā, jāle patitā viya sakuṇā, macchā viya cāti adhippāyo. Kuṇṭhā viyāti dandhā viya. Paṅguḷā viyāti pīṭhasappino viya. Diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhantīti adhiccasamuppannikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhanti. Yaṭṭhikoṭihetukaṃ gamanaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭigamanaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭiyā amuñcanato.
“即使如此”是说:虽然佛陀的声闻弟子也看不见无想有中的蕴转起,但他们还是能跳过无想有,再往更远的地方随念。“于轮转中……”等句,是显示他们随念的方式。“安立于佛陀所开示的理趣”,是指安立于正自觉者所说的法网中:“在五百劫里只有色转起,没有无色转起,那就是无想有。”他们就是这样,虽然看不见中间的死与结生,却能再往前随念,就像具寿索毗陀那样(《长老偈注》1.2.164)。据说,他在宿住随念上得了自在以后,顺着次序随念自己投生的地方,一直看到自己在无想有中是无心的结生;再往后,在五百劫那么长的时间里都看不到死与结生,最后才看到死,于是思择“这是什么”,依理路得出结论:“这应该是无想有。”世尊就把这件事作为因缘,把他立为宿住随念者中的第一。“观察死与结生之后”,这是显示他们的智是透过死与结生而转移的,也就说明他们没办法完全不触及一切有而越过。巴利
Evaṃ santepīti kāmaṃ buddhasāvakāpi asaññabhave khandhappavattiṃ na passanti, evaṃ santepi te buddhasāvakā asaññabhavaṃ laṅghitvā parato anussaranti. ‘‘Vaṭṭe’’tiādi tathā tesaṃ anussaraṇākāradassanaṃ. Buddhehi dinnanaye ṭhatvāti ‘‘yattha pañcakappasatāni rūpappavattiyeva, na arūpappavatti, so asaññabhavo’’ti evaṃ sammāsambuddhehi desitāyaṃ dhammanettiyaṃ ṭhatvā. Evañhi antarā cutipaṭisandhiyo apassantā parato anussaranti seyyathāpi āyasmā sobhitoti (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.2.164 sobhitattheragāthāvaṇṇanā). So kira pubbenivāse ciṇṇavasī hutvā anupaṭipāṭiyā attano nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ anussaranto yāva asaññabhave attano acittakapaṭisandhi tāva addasa, tato paraṃ pañcakappasataparimāṇe kāle cutipaṭisandhiyo adisvā avasāne cutiṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nāmeta’’nti āvajjayamāno nayavasena ‘‘asaññabhavo bhavissatī’’ti niṭṭhaṃ agamāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā taṃ kāraṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. ‘‘Cutipaṭisandhiṃ oloketvā’’ti idaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena tesaṃ ñāṇassa saṅkamanadassanaṃ, tena sabbaso bhave anāmasitvā gantuṃ na sakkontīti dasseti.
他们看见的正是那些法。就像在秋天正午时分,一个视力正常的人在四肘大的房屋里,眼前的色法对他来说是清清楚楚的——这是世间公认的事。不过,对于那些更微细、被遮蔽等类别的色法,他可能看不到。但诸佛对于任何想要了知的对象,绝不会有看不到的情况。因为所知障已被彻底断除,在智慧之光的照耀下,他们想知的对象就像放在手掌中的余甘子果一样,极其明显、极其清晰。因此说:“然而佛陀们,对于自己或他人所见、所作、所闻的事物,犹如日轮的光芒……”等等。巴利
Taṃ tadeva passantīti yathā nāma saradasamaye ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāya caturatanike gehe cakkhumato purisassa rūpagataṃ supākaṭameva hotīti lokasiddhametaṃ, siyā pana tassa sukhumataratirohitādibhedassa rūpagatassa agocaratā. Na tveva buddhānaṃ ñātuṃ icchitassa ñeyyassa agocaratā, atha kho taṃ ñāṇālokena obhāsitaṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya supākaṭaṃ suvibhūtameva hoti tathā ñeyyāvaraṇassa suppahīnattā. Tenāha ‘‘buddhā pana attanā vā parehi vā diṭṭhakatasutaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalobhāsasadisa’’nti ca ādi.
声闻和独觉佛也是如此。这里用“也是如此”这个词,承接的是“他们只忆念自己所见、所做、所闻的”这个说法,借此表明他们的随念只是局部的,并非无所不包。巴利
Tathā sāvakā ca paccekabuddhā cāti. Ettha tathā-saddena ‘‘attanā diṭṭhakatasutameva anussarantī’’ti idaṃ upasaṃharati, tena sappadesameva nesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ, na nippadesanti nidasseti.
就像萤火虫的光,这是说智慧的作用力极其微弱。这里说“声闻”,是指普通声闻的智慧光如同普通的油灯之光;大声闻的智慧光则如同大油灯之光。(《长老偈注》中关于旺吉萨长老偈颂的注释里有详细说明。)因此《清净道论》中说“犹如火炬之光”。“犹如药星之光”,是说这颗星光明旺盛,又因为它能给药草提供滋养的力量,所以叫“药星”,指的是那颗星的光芒。“犹如秋日太阳之光”,是因为它能彻底驱散黑暗。在取境时,因为不明利而导致的动摇状态,叫做“飘荡”;因为迟钝而不能通达所缘境,叫做“障碍”。“只系于转向”,意思是只依赖转向,在刚一转向的当下就能通达想要了知的对象。其余两句也是同样的道理。巴利
Khajjopanakaobhāsasadisaṃ ñāṇassa ativiya appānubhāvatāya. Sāvakānanti ettha pakatisāvakānaṃ pākatikapadīpobhāsasadisaṃ. Mahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsettharagāthāvaṇṇanāya vitthāro) mahāpadīpobhāsasadisaṃ. Tenāha visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402) ‘‘ukkāpabhāsadisa’’nti. Osadhitārakobhāsasadisanti ussannā pabhā etāya dhīyati, osadhīnaṃ vā anubalappadāyakattā ‘‘osadhī’’ti evaṃ laddhanāmāya tārakāya pabhāsadisaṃ. Saradasūriyamaṇḍalobhāsasadisaṃ sabbaso andhakāravidhamanato. Apaṭubhāvahetuko visayaggahaṇe cañcalabhāvo khalitaṃ, kuṇṭhibhāvahetuko visayassa anabhisamayo paṭighāto.Āvajjanapaṭibaddhamevāti āvajjanamattādhīnaṃ, āvajjitamatte eva yathicchitassa paṭivijjhanakanti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
为了说明世尊的智慧无论面对较轻易的对象还是较沉重的对象,都同样无滞无碍地运作,所以用“弱叶器皿”等两个譬喻来讲。由于世尊是法身,这些依世尊而说的功德,就说成是“唯缘于世尊而生起”。所谓“那一切”,就是指如上所说的、与宿住随念相关的一切说法。这里讲外道和声闻的宿住随念,是为了拿它们作为世尊宿住随念的低劣例子来对比,从而特别显出世尊的广大。所谓“简略而言”,就是概括地说。那些比丘把宿住随念智生起的种种差别——凡是自己智慧所能了知的范围——全都概括起来,按当时所说的那样说“itipi”。因为它是多种形态的,所以用重复的说法;“pi”这个词是合集的意思,“iti”这个词是表示方式,就像在“诸比丘,愚者这样有怖畏”等经文里那样。为了说明这个意思,注释里说“evampi”(也是这样)。巴利
Asaṅgaappaṭihataṃ pavattamānaṃ bhagavato ñāṇaṃ lahutarepi visaye, garutare ca ekasadisamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘dubbalapattapuṭe’’tiādinā upamādvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammakāyattā bhagavato guṇaṃ ārabbha pavattā ‘‘bhagavantaṃyeva ārabbha uppannā’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ sabbampi pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ. Titthiyānaṃ, sāvakānañca pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ bhagavato pubbenivāsānussaraṇassa hīnudāharaṇadassanavasenettha kathitaṃ. Evañhi bhagavato mahantabhāvo visesato pakāsito hotīti. Saṅkhepatoti samāsato. Yattakopi pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa pavattibhedo attano ñāṇassa visayabhūto, taṃ sabbaṃ tadā yathākathitaṃ te bhikkhū saṅkhipitvā ‘‘itipī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tassa ca anekākāratāya āmeḍitavacanaṃ, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, ‘‘iti kho bhikkhave sappaṭibhayo bālo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124; a. ni. 3.1) viya ākārattho iti-saddoti dassento ‘‘evampī’’ti tadatthamāha.
2-3 “已说”在这里的意思是:在本文这个段落中,凡是与那段文句共通的内容,就是这里所说的“已说”,而不是指不共通的部分,因为对新词的解释更为特别。为了说明这一点,注释说“这就是差别”等。“听到了”是就听闻作用的完成而说的,因为通过把握声音就能了知其中的含义。但在经文中,则直接说“了知这个略说法之后”。这里的连接是:这些比丘赞叹我的功德,怎样赞叹呢?是就我的宿住智而赞叹。“成就”指作用的完成,意思是所应做的事已经完成。“No”是疑问词,与“nu”同义,所以注释说“你们想要吗”。“那”指世尊。“彼世尊”中的“yaṃ”一词是代指行为的,即“开示法语”;这个开示法语的行为被代指,就是“此之”一词所指的内容,因此注释说“此开示法语之举”。出于敬意,重复了两次。巴利
2-3.Vuttamevāti ettha ca idha pāṭhe yaṃ vattabbaṃ tena pāṭhena sādhāraṇaṃ, taṃ vuttamevāti adhippetaṃ, na asādhāraṇaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanāya adhikatattāti taṃ dassento ‘‘ayameva hi viseso’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Assosī’’ti idaṃ savanakiccanipphattiyā vuttaṃ saddaggahaṇamukhena tadatthāvabodhassa siddhattā. Tattha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘imaṃ saṃkhiyadhammaṃ viditvā’’ icceva (dī. ni. 1.2) vuttaṃ. Ime bhikkhū mama guṇe thomenti, kathaṃ? Mama pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ ārabbhāti yojanā. Nipphattinti kiccanipphattiṃ, tena kātabbakiccasiddhanti attho. Noti pucchāvācī nu-iti iminā samānattho nipātoti vuttaṃ ‘‘iccheyyātha nū’’ti. Nanti bhagavantaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ bhagavā’’ti ettha yaṃ-saddena kiriyāparāmasanabhūtena ‘‘dhammiṃ kathaṃ katheyyā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammikathākaraṇaṃ parāmaṭṭhaṃ ‘‘etassā’’ti padassa atthoti āha ‘‘etassa dhammikathākaraṇassā’’ti, ādaravasena pana taṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ.
4 请听。这里的“iti”这个词表示开端,或者表示方式,用它可以涵盖“请留意”这句话。把耳朵转向、侧耳倾听,意思就是善听。那些人的轮回之路已被截断、彻底切断,所以叫“断轮者”,包括正自觉者和其他诸漏尽者,但这里特指正自觉者。因为随念他们的一切,是其他人所做不到的。因此注释说“为他人所不共”。“yaṃ”这个词出现在主格表达中,是因为它说明行为的主体;出现在对格表达中,是因为它说明询问动作的对象。而“taṃ”是对格,因为“问”这个动词带有两个宾语。“yaṃ”表示“由什么原因”,这就是这里的含义,所以注释说“出现在具格中”。应当看作处格,也就是说,“yaṃ”这个词不只出现在主格和对格中,也出现在具格中,同样在这里应当看作处格。“十千世界”指作为诞生田的一万轮围世界。佛陀出现时,伴随众多稀有瑞相的显现,所以轰然出世。巴利
4.Suṇāthāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, etena ‘‘manasi karothā’’ti padaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sotāvadhānaṃ sotassa odahanaṃ, sussūsāti attho. Chinnaṃ upacchinnaṃ vaṭumaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ etesanti chinnavaṭumakā, sammāsambuddhā, aññe ca khīṇāsavā, idha pana sammāsambuddhā adhippetā. Tesañhi sabbaso anussaraṇaṃ itaresaṃ avisayo. Tenāha ‘‘aññesaṃ asādhāraṇa’’nti. Paccattavacane dissati yaṃ-saddo kammatthadīpanato. Upayogavacane dissati yaṃ-saddo pucchanakiriyāya kammatthadīpanato. Tanti ca upayogavacanameva pucchati-saddassa dvikammakabhāvato. Yanti yena kāraṇenāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘karaṇavacane dissatī’’ti. Bhummeti daṭṭhabboti yathā yaṃ-saddo na kevalaṃ paccattaupayogesu eva, atha kho karaṇepi dissati, evaṃ idha bhummeti daṭṭhabbo. Dasasahassilokadhātunti jātikkhettabhūtaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷaṃ. Unnādento uppajji anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitattā buddhuppādassa.
所谓“劫的吉祥”,是指在这个劫里,众生的功德显现得很殊胜,而佛陀出世又是最殊胜的功德显现,所以这个劫因为佛陀出世多而被称为“吉祥劫”,因此说“以五佛出世庄严,所以叫庄严劫”。同样,从具有核心功德的角度,也叫“核心劫”。说了“赞颂这个劫时,就是这样说的”之后,为了显示这个劫确实值得这样赞颂,而且这种赞颂是其他劫所没有的,就说了“从……以来”等话。其中,“从……以来”是指从发愿成佛开始。这位菩萨具足了人身等八个条件,发起了成佛的愿。因为轮回没有开端,在这位世尊发愿之前,已经有无边无数的正自觉者出世;为了排除他们出世所在的那些劫,才说“在这段期间”。虽然这位世尊是在燃灯佛出世时发愿的,但燃灯佛的诞生是在他发愿之前,所以说“我们的……诞生了”。巴利
Kālassa bhaddatā nāma tattha sattānaṃ guṇavibhūtiyā, buddhuppādaparamā ca guṇavibhūtīti tabbahulatā yassa kappassa bhaddatāti āha ‘‘pañcabuddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitattā sundarakappe’’ti, tathā sārabhūtaguṇavasena ‘‘sārakappe’’ti . ‘‘Imaṃ kappaṃ thomento evamāhā’’ti vatvā imassa kappassa tathā thometabbatā anaññasādhāraṇāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yato paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yato paṭṭhāyāti yato pabhuti abhinīhāro katoti manussattādiaṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato abhinīhāro pavattito. Saṃsārassa anādibhāvato imassa bhagavato abhinīhārato puretaraṃ uppannā sammāsambuddhā anantā aparimeyyāti tehi uppannakappe nivattento ‘‘etasmiṃ antare’’ti āha. Kāmaṃ dīpaṅkarabuddhuppāde ayaṃ bhagavā abhinīhāramakāsi, tassa pana bhagavato nibbatti imassa abhinīhārato purimatarāti vuttaṃ ‘‘amhākaṃ…pe… nibbattiṃsū’’ti.
在无数劫的尽头,是指诸大劫的无数终结。接下来的各处也是同样的方式。
从这以上三十千劫,以此说明在莲华上佛和善慧佛之间,有六万九千劫没有佛出世。
从这以上十八千劫,以此说明在善生佛和见义佛之间,有一万二千缺一劫没有佛出世。
在九十四劫中,以此说明在见法佛和悉达多佛之间,有一万七千九百零六劫没有佛出世。
在三十一劫中,以此说明在维巴西佛和西奇佛之间,有六十劫没有佛出世。
所有这些劫,连同从善慧等佛出世以来的劫,一起算到莲华上佛此边为止,合计为十万劫。在此期间,大声闻等人积集了作为离转依止的种种善业。即使在无佛出世的世间,独觉佛也会出现,成为那些特别之人福德流注与增上慧的条件。
如此等语,是以总结的方式重申前面所说的内容。巴利
Asaṅkhyeyyakappapariyosāneti mahākappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyapariyosāne. Esa nayo ito paresupi. ‘‘Ito tiṃsakappasahassānaṃ uparī’’ti etena padumuttarassa bhagavato, sumedhassa ca bhagavato antare ekūnasattatikappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ito aṭṭhārasannaṃ kappasahassānaṃ uparī’’ti iminā sujātassa bhagavato, atthadassissa ca bhagavato antare ekenūnāni dvādasakappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ito catunavute kappe’’ti iminā dhammadassissa bhagavato, siddhatthassa ca bhagavato antare chādhikanavasatuttarāni sattarasakappasahassāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. ‘‘Ekatiṃse kappe’’ti iminā vipassissa bhagavato, sikhissa ca bhagavato antare saṭṭhi kappāni buddhasuññāni ahesunti dasseti. Te sabbepi padumuttarassa bhagavato oraṃ sumedhādīhi uppannakappehi saddhiṃ samodhāniyamānā satasahassā kappā honti, yattha mahāsāvakādayo (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) vivaṭṭū panissayāni kusalāni sambhariṃsu. Buddhasuññepi loke paccekabuddhā uppajjitvā tesaṃ purisavisesānaṃ puññābhisandābhibuddhiyā paccayā honti. ‘‘Evamaya’’ntiādi vuttamevatthaṃ nigamanavasena vadati.
“那么,这是什么呢?”这一段,是为了说明诸佛出世的前兆而开始的。其中,“此”指的是诸佛的出世。“在劫形成的时期”,指的是成劫正在形成的时期。“一个无数劫”,是针对坏劫住立的阶段而说的。“成为一片平坦空旷之地而住立”,是说因为山、树、灌木等以及云等都不存在了,变成一片开阔平坦的空地而住立。在“世间居住之处”,指的是器世间应当安住的地方。二十竿等于一乌沙巴(usabha)。在“一乌沙巴量、二乌沙巴量”等说法中,“量”这个字要分别配合每一处来理解。“成为一千由旬那么大”,是说水柱向下倾注时,弥漫遍满一千由旬的虚空而流下,所以成为一千由旬那么大。“乃至梵天界未坏”,意思是乃至光音天梵天界、遍净天梵天界,乃至广果天梵天界。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ paneta’’ntiādi pubbanimittavibhāvanatthāya āraddhaṃ. Tattha etanti buddhānaṃ uppajjanaṃ. Kappasaṇṭhānakālasminti vivaṭṭakappassa saṇṭhahanakāle. Ekamasaṅkhyeyyanti saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyiṃ sandhāyāha. Ekaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhiteti pabbatarukkhagacchādīnaṃ, meghādīnañca abhāvena vivaṭaṃaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhite. Lokasannivāseti bhājanalokena sannivisitabbaṭṭhāne. Vīsati yaṭṭhiyo usabhaṃ. ‘‘Usabhamattā, dve usabhamattā’’tiādinā paccekaṃ mattā-saddo yojetabbo. Yojanasahassamattā hutvāti patamānāva udakadhārā yojanasahassamattaṃ ākāsaṭṭhānaṃ pharitvā pavattiyā yojanasahassamattā hutvā. Yāva avinaṭṭhabrahmalokāti yāva ābhassarabrahmalokā, yāva subhakiṇhabrahmalokā, yāva vehapphalabrahmalokāti attho.
由风之力是指:凭借高十万五千由旬的持风轮之力。大菩提座是指大菩提座的区域。它后来毁坏、最初安立,应当知道这是法性如此。在那里就是在那个区域。成为前兆就是成为佛陀出世的前兆。因为那灌木是前兆的所依,所以依所依的名称这样称呼它。因此说它的等等。成为如花环所系就是如同系上了花环一样。净居梵天神们心生喜悦……而去,这是句子的连接。广果天也把遍净天包含在内,所以说九梵天界。因为它们事实上也只归属于第四识住。出发就是进行大出家的时候。这里的诞生,由于出生状态相同,也包含了入胎。依此推知、衡量果,所以叫相,也就是因。因为即使只是能使人了知的因,在见到它之后,由于它必定不离果,也就把果确定下来而认取了;就像阿斯达仙人见到大士诞生时的各种大人相后,由于这些相必定不离佛果,便认定佛的功德已经成就而认取一样。然而这样认取时,以这个相为前兆的果,由于相的存在,就被说成仿佛是由它的力量所成就。因此说由于那些相的力量等等。世尊也这样说:具足此相者……为国王时得什么,为佛陀时得什么?等等。此义就是:此劫中将有五佛出世,他们如实了知。巴利
Vātavasenāti saṭṭhisahassādhikanavayojanasatasahassubbedhassa sandhārakavātamaṇḍalassa vasena. Mahābodhipallaṅkoti mahābodhipallaṅkappadesamāha. Tassa pacchā vināso, paṭhamaṃ saṇṭhahanañca dhammatāvasena veditabbaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ padese. Pubbanimittaṃ hutvāti buddhappādassa pubbanimittaṃ hutvā. Pubbanimittasannissayo hi gaccho nissitavohārena tathā vutto. Tenāha ‘‘tassā’’tiādi. Kaṇṇikābaddhāni hutvāti ābaddhakaṇṇikā viya hutvā. Suddhāvāsabrahmāno attamanā…pe… gacchantīti yojanā. Vehapphalepi subhakiṇhe saṅgahetvā ‘‘nava brahmalokā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te catutthiṃyeva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ bhajanti. Nikkhamantesūti mahābhinikkhamanaṃ abhinikkhamantesu. Abhijāti panettha jātibhāvasāmaññena gabbhokkantiyāva saṅgahitā. Nimīyati anumīyati phalaṃ etenāti nimittaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Ñāpakampi hi kāraṇaṃ disvā tassa abyabhicārībhāvena phalaṃ siddhameva katvā gaṇhi, yathā taṃ asito isi abhijātiyaṃ mahāpurisassa lakkhaṇāni disvā tesaṃ abyabhicārībhāvena buddhaguṇe siddhe eva katvā gaṇhi, evaṃ pana gayhamānaṃ tannimittakaṃ phalaṃ tadānubhāvena siddhaṃ viya voharīyati tabbhāve bhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ nimittānaṃ ānubhāvenā’’tiādi. Tathā cāha bhagavā ‘‘so tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato…pe… rājā samāno kiṃ labhati, buddho samāno kiṃ labhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.202, 204) ca evamādi. Imamatthanti pañca buddhā imasmiṃ kappe uppajjissantīti imamatthaṃ yāthāvato jāniṃsu.
关于生之区分等的注释巴利
Jātiparicchedādivaṇṇanā
5-7 以劫的划分方式来说,就是通过“从这(劫)起第九十一劫”等说法,对那些有佛陀出世的劫,逐一加以界定和认知。因为先确定“这是这个”,再加以区分而了知,这就是界定、划分。“小”是指短暂。“轻”是指非常轻快,因为这里说的是寿命,所以也就是短的意思。因此说:“这两个都是‘少’的同义词。”巴利
5-7.Kappaparicchedavasenāti ‘‘ito so ekanavute kappe’’tiādinā yattha yattha kappe te te buddhā uppannā, tassa tassa kappassa paricchindanavasena parijānanavasena. ‘‘Idaṃ ta’’nti hi niyametvā paricchijja jānanaṃ paricchindanaṃ paricchedo. Parittanti ittaraṃ. Lahukanti sallahukaṃ, āyuno adhippetattā rassanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayametaṃ appakasseva vevacana’’nti.
“或者少,或者更多”这句话是在笼统说明,没有限定到底是二十还是三十等,而是按照实际遇到的情况来判定。接着为了说明这个方法并不普遍适用,就说“然而像这样长寿的人极为难得”。这是把这种特别的判定放到具体人物身上来展示,于是说“其中,毗舍佉”等等。巴利
‘‘Appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti avisesajotanaṃ ‘‘vīsaṃ vā tiṃsaṃ vā’’tiādinā aniyamitavaseneva yathālābhato vavatthapetvā ayañca nayo apacuroti dassento ‘‘evaṃ dīghāyuko pana atidullabho’’ti āha. Idaṃ taṃ visesavavatthāpanaṃ puggalesu pakkhipitvā dassento ‘‘tattha visākhā’’tiādimāha.
如果是这样,为什么我们的世尊没有活那么久呢?难道大菩萨在最后一生不是以极为殊胜的福行来结生吗?这是真的。为了说明其中的原因,才说了“然而维巴西佛等”。其中,由于种姓高贵和以慈为住处,行所造识以慈为前导,因为他们的结生识特别与慈相应。应当知道,它特别殊胜之处在于:由于以安隐寻为强有力的依止,所以与喜悦相应;由于以不共于他人、不需他人教导的智慧殊胜为依止,所以与智相应;而且是无行的。他们的寿量无量,这是因为支持殊胜、依止殊胜、敌对远离和转起行相殊胜,其原因是具有不可测量的威力。其中,长久以来相续被巴拉密所修习,是支持殊胜;无贪等意乐的成就,是依止殊胜;镇伏利养悭吝等恶法,是敌对远离;为了令一切众生脱离轮回众苦而勤修,应当知道这是转起行相殊胜。巴利
Yadi evaṃ kasmā amhākaṃ bhagavā tattakampi kālaṃ na jīvi, nanu mahābodhisattā carimabhave ativiyauḷāratamena puññābhisaṅkhārena paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti? Saccametanti. Tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vipassīādayo panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijātiyā mettāṭhānatāya abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa mettāpubbabhāgatā. Tadanuguṇañhi tesaṃ visesato paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tassa visesato bahulaṃ khemavitakkūpanissayatāya somanassasahagatatā, anaññasādhāraṇaparopadesarahitañāṇavisesūpanissayatāya ñāṇasampayuttatā, asaṅkhārikatā ca veditabbā, asaṅkhyeyyaṃ āyu ādhāravisesato, nissayavisesato, paṭipakkhadūrībhāvato, pavattiākāravisesato ca aparimeyyānubhāvatāya kāraṇassa. Tattha cirataraṃ kālaṃ santānassa pāramitāparibhāvitatā ādhāravisesatā. Alobhajjhāsayādiāsayasampadā nissayavisesatā. Lābhamacchariyādipāpadhammavikkhambhanaṃ paṭipakkhadūrībhāvo. Sabbasattānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthāya āyūhanā pavattiākāraviseso veditabbo.
这个道理,对于一切大菩萨在最后一生中造作投生之业来说都是共通的,因此其果报也必然完全相同,所以经文说“iti sabbe buddhā asaṅkhyeyyāyukā”(如是,一切佛陀皆有无量寿),意思是“他们的寿命以不可计量的时间为限度”。虽然有修习成熟、能感得无量寿的业,但诸佛只是随顺当时人间最高寿命的限度而住世,然后入般涅槃,因为再往后住世也没有需要成办的利益了;或者也可以理解为这就是法性。不过,注疏中对“再往后不能住世”给出了“由于时节和饮食的过失”这一原因,但不能说“这不适用于在世间出生、成长的如来”,因为事实上他们确实也会有病痛、疲劳等。所谓由时节和饮食之力,就是说不圆满的时节与饮食,以及圆满的时节与饮食,依次使寿命减损或增长。这里说的“寿命”指的是最高寿量。关于这一点应当说明的内容,已经在《梵网经义疏》中讲过了。巴利
Ayañca nayo sabbesaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ carimabhavābhinibbattakakammāyūhane sādhāraṇoti tassa phalenāpi ekasadiseneva bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘iti sabbe buddhā asaṅkhyeyyāyukā’’ti, asaṅkhyeyyakālāvatthānāyukāti attho. Asaṅkhyeyyāyukasaṃvattanasamatthaṃ paricitaṃ kammaṃ hoti, buddhā pana tadā manussānaṃ paramāyuppamāṇānurūpameva kālaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyanti tato paraṃ ṭhatvā sādhetabbapayojanābhāvato, dhammatāvesāti vā veditabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tato paraṃ pana aṭṭhānassa ‘‘utubhojanavipattiyā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.5) kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘taṃ lokasādhāraṇaṃ loke jātasaṃvuddhānaṃ tathāgatānaṃ na hotī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā hi nesaṃ rogakilamathādayo hontiyeva. Utubhojanavasenāti asampannassa, sampannassa ca utuno, bhojanassa ca vasena yathākkamaṃ āyu hāyatipi vaḍḍhatipi. Āyūti ca paramāyu adhippetaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ brahmajālādiṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.40) vuttameva.
现在,为了从事情的起因开始说明它的含义,就说了“其中,当……的时候”等等。致力于法的人叫“如法者”,不致力于法的人叫“不如法者”,也就是从事杀害等非法行为的人。因为随顺统治者、又跟随别人的见解,就成了不如法者。“热云天神”是生起云层、成为热季之因的天子。据说当他们生起这样的心念时,同时就在他们想要的地方散布热气,不太厚的云层到处铺满天空展开。冷云、雨云也是这样。而“雾云天神”应当理解为:不靠冷热和雨,只是生起雾层的天子。对她们,这里把“友”这个词拿来连接。前面说的七种天神虽然都属于四天王天,但逐一说明各自的差别之后,现在把其他初层欲界天神从总体上把握,所以说“四天王天”。由于这些天神的不如法——以国王的不如法为根源,再经由副王等的不如法辗转传来,从而产生这些天神的不如法——月亮和太阳运行失常:因为多病等不可意果报的亲近缘,被前面所说的不如法共业之力所推动,受不均匀吹动的风所逼迫,月亮和太阳绕着须弥山不均匀地旋转,不沿着正常的轨道运行。为了说明月亮和太阳的这种失常旋转是由不正常的狂风扰动引起的,同样,季节和降雨等也失常运行,就说了“风不沿正常轨道吹”等等。对天神们,是指冷云天神等天神。因此说了“冷热的差别就是季节”等等。当它不成就时,就是说当上面所说的、作为降雨之因的季节不按时节达到圆满时。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ samudāgamato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhamme niyuttā dhammikā, na dhammikā adhammikā, hiṃsādiadhammapasutā. Adhammikameva hoti issarajanānaṃ anuvattanena, paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanena ca. Uṇhavalāhakā devatāti uṇhautuno paccayabhūtameghamālāsamuṭṭhāpakā devaputtā. Tesaṃ kira tathā cittuppādasamakālameva yathicchitaṭṭhānaṃ uṇhaṃ pharamānā valāhakamālā nātibahalā ito cito nabhaṃ chādentī vitanoti. Esa nayo sītavalāhakavassavalāhakāsu. Abbhavalāhakā pana devatā sītuṇhavassehi vinā kevalaṃ abbhapaṭalasseva samuṭṭhāpakā veditabbā. Tāsanti ettha ‘‘mittā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojanā. Kāmaṃ heṭṭhā vuttā sattavidhāpi devatā cātumahārājikāva tā pana tena tena visesena vatvā idāni tadaññe paṭhamabhūmike kāmāvacaradeve sāmaññato gaṇhanto ‘‘cātumahārājikā’’ti āha. Tāsaṃ adhammikatāyāti rājūnaṃ adhammikabhāvamūlakena uparājādiadhammikabhāvaparamparābhatena tāsaṃ devatānaṃ adhammikabhāvena. Visamaṃ candimasūriyā pariharantīti bahvābādhatādi aniṭṭhaphalūpanissayabhūtassa yathāvuttaadhammikatāsaññitassa sādhāraṇassa pāpakammassa balena visamaṃ vāyantena vāyunā pīḷiyamānā candimasūriyā sineruṃ parikkhipantā visamaṃ parivattanti yathāmaggena nappavattantīti . Assidaṃ yathā candimasūriyānaṃ visamaparivattanaṃ visamavātasaṅkhobhahetukaṃ, evaṃ utuvassādivisamappavattīti dassetuṃ ‘‘vāto yathāmaggena na vāyatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Devatānanti sītavalāhakadevatādidevatānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sītuṇhabhedo utū’’tiādi. Tasmiṃ asampajjanteti tasmiṃ yathāvutte vassabījabhūte utumhi yathākālaṃ sampattiṃ anupagacchante.
天不按正确的方式降雨,这句话简略说出的含义,展开来讲就是有时等那些话。其中,有时降雨,是说有时在不下雨的时候下雨。有时不降雨,是说有时在该下雨的时候不下雨。某处下雨,某处不下雨,这是就地区来说的。即使正在下雨等句子,是对有时下雨、有时不下雨这两句本身的含义解说。无香、无色、无味等,用等字把没有营养也包括进去。在一个地方,比如煮饭容器的某一边。涨出米粒,就是煮熟后溢出来的米粒。以三种方式,就是完全没熟、部分已熟、过熟这三种方式。熟,指达到熟成。在此短命处也应当说容色丑陋。如是,由于时节与饮食之故,即便因未穷尽,由于缘极其羸弱,寿命也会减损。巴利
‘‘Na sammā devo vassatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘kadācī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kadāci vassatīti kadāci avassanakāle vassati. Kadāci na vassatīti kadāci vassitabbakāle na vassati. Katthaci vassati, katthaci na vassatīti padesamāha. ‘‘Vassantopī’’tiādi ‘‘kadāci vassati, kadāci na vassatī’’ti padadvayasseva atthavivaraṇaṃ. Vigatagandhavaṇṇarasādīti ādi-saddena nirojataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekasmiṃ padeseti bhattapacanabhājanassa ekapasse. Uttaṇḍulanti pākato ukkantataṇḍulaṃ. Tīhākārehīti sabbaso apariṇataṃ, ekadesena pariṇataṃ, dupariṇatañcāti evaṃ tīhākārehi. Paccati pakkāsayaṃ upagacchati. Appāyukāti ettha ‘‘dubbaṇṇā cā’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ utubhojanavasena āyu hāyati hetumhi aparikkhīṇepi paccayassa paridubbalattā.
“然而,当……时”这一段,是白分(善的一类)的内容,应当按前面所说的相反情况来理解。巴利
‘‘Yadā panā’’tiādi sukkapakkhassa attho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo.
寿命逐渐增长之后又逐渐减损,这一点应当理解。为什么呢?因为在一个小劫之中,不会有多位佛陀出现,只有一位佛陀出现。现在为了详细说明这个道理,说出了“如何”等话。“四”是表示极度关联的宾格用法。“在各种寿量之中”是指在种种最高寿量当中。“对于他们”是指对于诸佛。那寿量就是那样,其中的理由前面已经说过了。巴利
Vaḍḍhitvāvaḍḍhitvā parihīnanti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā? Na hi ekasmiṃ antarakappe aneke buddhā uppajjanti, eko eva pana uppajjatīti. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Cattāri ṭhatvāti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Yaṃyaṃāyuparimāṇesūti yattakayattakaparamāyuppamāṇesu. Tesampīti buddhānaṃ. Taṃ tadeva āyuparimāṇaṃ hoti, tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
菩提分段的注释巴利
Bodhiparicchedavaṇṇanā
8 在“根部”这里,指的是根部附近的区域。那又是指它的下方位置,所以经文说“在波咤厘树的下方”。“那一天”,是指他自己出生的那天,或者是指世尊成正等觉的那天。据说,那棵菩提树像一棵美好的娑罗树一样,先在地底下生长,到了成正等觉那天,破土而出,高达一百罗陀那(一罗陀那约七肘),同时向四周伸展,遍满虚空而站立。据说这棵树在树的形态上也和其他树不同:它的茎干紧密结实,花朵像是系在花蕊座上一样。“单一覆蔽”,是说花朵之间没有空隙,密密地覆盖在一起,这里那里系结着……到处垂下的花鬘,和这里那里抛上去的花团,以及四处散落的、各种从茎上脱落的花,都发出明亮的光辉。“相互具足庄严”,是说彼此在祥瑞和美丽上都圆满具足。“佛陀功德威光的庄严”,是指正自觉者们所应证得的功德威德之光辉。“正在通达”,是指正在证得。巴利
8.Mūleti mūlāvayavassa samīpe. Taṃ pana tassā heṭṭhāpadeso hotīti āha ‘‘pāṭalirukkhassa heṭṭhā’’ti. Taṃdivasanti attanā jātadivase, taṃdivasanti vā taṃ bhagavato abhisambodhidivase. So kira bodhirukkho sālakalyāṇī viya pathaviyā abbhantare eva puretaraṃ vaḍḍhento abhisambodhidivase pathaviṃ ubbhijjitvā uṭṭhito ratanasataṃ ucco, tāvadeva ca vitthato hutvā nabhaṃ pūrento aṭṭhāsi. Ayampi kiretassa rukkhabhāvena viya aññehi vemattatā. Ghanasaṃhatanāḷavaṇṭatāya kaṇṇikabaddhehi viya pupphehi. Ekasañchannāti pupphānaṃ nirantaratāya ekajjhaṃ sañchannā, tattha tattha nibaddha…pe… samujjalanti tahaṃ tahaṃ olambitakusumadāmehi ceva tahaṃ tahaṃ khittamālāpiṇḍīhi ca ito cito vippakiṇṇavividhavaṇṭamuttapupphehi ca sammadeva ujjalaṃ. Aññamaññaṃ sirīsampattānīti aññamaññassa siriyā sobhāya sampannāni. Buddhaguṇavibhavasirinti sammāsambuddhehi abhigantabbaguṇavibhūtisobhaṃ. Paṭivijjhamānoti adhigacchanto.
白芒果树,是指结白色果实的芒果树。那相同的,是说和波吒厘树所说的尺寸完全一样。一边,是指在某一侧。极为甘甜,是指味道非常甜。巴利
Setambarukkhoti setavaṇṇaphalo ambarukkho. Tadevāti pāṭaliyā vuttappamāṇameva. Ekatoti ekapasse. Surasānīti sumadhurarasāni.
只有一处盘腿坐的地方,就是指只有一个结跏趺坐的位置。那棵树被称为“菩提树”,是因为人们在那里觉悟。巴利
Ekova pallaṅkoti ekova pallaṅkappadeso. So so rukkho ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati bujjhanti etthāti katvā.
声闻双品注释巴利
Sāvakayugaparicchedavaṇṇanā
9 在“声闻分”这一节,也就是对声闻双贤的分判中,把“堪达底沙”两个人合在一起、作为一体来说,所以注释里说“堪达与底沙”。他们是佛陀同母所生的弟弟,或者是同父异母的弟弟,但不是兄长,因此说“同父的幼弟”。这是相对于其余王子来说的。说了“已达到慧巴拉密的顶点”之后,为了显示他所达到的殊胜功德,接着说了“由世尊斯奇……”等内容。巴利
9.Sāvakaparicchedeti sāvakayugaparicchede. ‘‘Khaṇḍatissa’’nti dvepi ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ekattavasena vuttanti āha ‘‘khaṇḍo ca tisso cā’’ti, buddhānaṃ sahodaro, vemātikopi vā jeṭṭhabhātā na hotīti ‘‘ekapitiko kaniṭṭhabhātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avasesehi puttehi. ‘‘Paññāpāramiyā matthakaṃ patto’’ti vatvā tassa matthakappattaṃ guṇavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sikhinā bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
优多罗就是最上。接着又说“优多罗”,是用名字来称呼这位长老。“彼岸”指最极、最顶。“慧境”指智慧所涉及的领域。确实,这是以生起的依处为根据而说生起。巴利
Uttaroti uttamo. Puna uttaroti theraṃ nāmena vadati. Pāranti parakoṭimatthakaṃ. Paññāvisayeti paññādhikāre. Pavattiṭṭhānavasena hi pavattiṃ vadati.
声闻集会品注释巴利
Sāvakasannipātaparicchedavaṇṇanā
10 “伍波萨他”是指诵持别解脱戒经。“在第二、第三次”是指在第二次和第三次声闻集会时。“正是这个方法”是指示这也适用于四支具足的情况。从发愿开始讲起,讲完事情经过之后,就应当说明出家的事。不过,因为这在《满足希求》即《增支部注释》中已经详细说过了,所以应当依照那里所说的方法来理解。巴利
10.Uposathanti āṇāpātimokkhaṃ. Dutiyatatiyesūti dutiye, tatiye ca sāvakasannipāte. Eseva nayoti caturaṅgikataṃ atidisati. Abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya vatthuṃ kathetvā pabbajjā dīpetabbā, sā pana yasmā manorathapūraṇiyaṃ aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.211) vitthārato āgatā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbāti.
侍者品注释巴利
Upaṭṭhākaparicchedavaṇṇanā
11 “固定侍者身份”是指从最初开始直到般涅槃,始终确定担任侍者的身份。不过,世尊最初成道时,曾有很多不固定的侍者。因此说“世尊的……”等等。现在,为了说明阿难长老是出于什么原因、以什么方式成为导师的固定侍者,才说了“在那里,有一次……”等等。其中,“我要走这条路”这句话,是他被那种会导致不幸和灾祸的业所催促而说的。那时,世尊没有把这件事告诉他,只是指着安全的道路说:“来吧,比丘,我们走这条路。”那么,世尊为什么不把这件事告诉他呢?因为就算告诉了,他也不会相信、不会接受,那件事只会长久地对他不利、带来痛苦。Teti是指他们行走,或者读作taṃ。巴利
11.Nibaddhupaṭṭhākabhāvanti ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva parinibbānā niyataupaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ. Aniyatuupaṭṭhākā pana bhagavato paṭhamabodhiyaṃ bahū ahesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Idāni ānandatthero yena kāraṇena satthu nibaddhupaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ upagato, yathā ca upagato, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha ekadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ahaṃ iminā maggena gacchāmī’’ti āha anayabyasanāpādakena kammunā codiyamāno . Atha naṃ bhagavā tamatthaṃ anārocetvāva khemaṃ maggaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ehi bhikkhu iminā gacchāmā’’ti āha. Kasmā panassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ nārocesīti? Ārocitepi asaddahanto nādiyissati. Tañhi tassa hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyātiti. Teti te gamanaṃ, ‘‘ta’’nti vā pāṭho.
Anvāsatta的意思是被跟随、被纠缠,或者被逼迫。因为对法的恭敬而生起的悚惧,就是法悚惧,也就是这样想:“我们还在的时候,世尊竟然也发生了这样的事。”说“我来侍奉”的舍利弗长老,从意义上正是在这样说,所以说“尊者,我,你们……”等等。他说“我那个方向并非空虚”,意思是我那个方向并不空虚。对此,他说明了原因:“您的教诫如同诸佛陀的教诫。”巴利
Anvāsattoti anubaddho, upadduto vā. Dhammagāravanissito saṃvego dhammasaṃvego ‘‘amhesu nāma tiṭṭhantesu bhagavatopi īdisaṃ jāta’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vadanto dhammasenāpati atthato evaṃ vadanto nāma hotīti ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asuññāyeva me sā disāti asuññāyeva mama sā disā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘tava ovādo buddhānaṃ ovādasadiso’’ti.
“他将不能住下来”,意思是他在同一间香室里得不到住处。说“背对着宣说的法”,是针对经教的教导而说的。至于阿毗达摩的教导,对他则完全是在背后进行的,更不必说请求了。它的诵传传承也是从舍利弗长老开始的。为什么呢?因为它如同《义释》《无碍解道》一样,是长老从比丘处领受之法蕴的一部分。不过另一些人说:“法藏师依次在三法、二法中每天找机会向世尊提问,世尊也按所问的问题,以提示要点的方式为他解答。这样一来,阿毗达摩虽然是导师在背后宣说的,长老却是当面领受的。”这一切都要审察之后再接受。巴利
Vasituṃ na dassatīti ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vāsaṃ na labhissatīti adhippāyo. Parammukhā desitassāpi dhammassāti suttantadesanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Abhidhammadesanā panassa parammukhāva pavattā pageva yācanāya. Tassā vācanāmaggopi sāriputtattherappabhavo. Kasmā? So niddesapaṭisambhidā viya therassa bhikkhuto gahitadhammakkhandhapakkhiyo. Apare pana ‘‘dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko paṭipāṭiyā tikadukesu devasikaṃ katokāso bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi, bhagavāpissa pucchitapucchitaṃ nayadānavasena vissajjesi. Evaṃ abhidhammopi satthārā parammukhā desitopi therena sammukhā paṭiggahitova ahosī’’ti vadanti. Sabbaṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
“上首侍者”是指因为侍奉时做事恭敬认真,所以成为最殊胜的侍者。这位长老自从得到侍者职位开始,就用两种水、三种齿木、洗脚护理、打扫香室和精舍周围等等事务来侍奉世尊。他心里盘算:“这个时间,应该让导师得到这个东西;这个时间,应该做这件事。”然后一件一件去完成。他拿着大火炬,整夜绕着香室周围走九圈。他心里这样想:“如果昏沉睡眠袭来,世尊叫我的时候,我可能没办法应答。”所以他整夜都不把手里的火炬放下。因此说他是“上首侍者”。巴利
Aggupaṭṭhākoti upaṭṭhāne sakkaccakāritāya aggabhūto upaṭṭhāko. Thero hi upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ duvidhena udakena, tividhena dantakaṭṭhena, pādaparikammena, gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanenāti evamādīhi kiccehi upaṭṭhahanto ‘‘imāya nāma velāya satthu idaṃ nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā taṃ taṃ nipphādento mahatiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ gahetvā ekarattiṃ gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ nava vāre anupariyāyati. Evaṃ hissa ahosi ‘‘sace me thinamiddhaṃ okkameyya, bhagavati pakkosante paṭivacanaṃ dātuṃ nāhaṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti, tasmā sabbarattiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ hatthena na muñcati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aggupaṭṭhāko’’ti.
12 12. 关于“父母所生之城节”这一节:因为是通过父亲这一方而来的,所以说为“父系节”。巴利
12. Pitumātujātanagaraparicchedo pitumukhena āgatattā ‘‘pitiparicchedo’’ti vutto.
“进入精舍”就是进入香室。“讲到这里为止”,是说开示了以劫的划分等九种方式庄严的、与维巴斯等七位佛陀的宿住随念相关的教法,讲到这里就结束了。那么,世尊为什么在这里只讲维巴斯等七位佛陀的宿住,而不像《佛种姓经》里那样讲二十五位乃至更多佛陀呢?因为不属于论题范围,也没有必要。因为在《佛种姓经》中(佛种姓75):巴利
Vihāraṃ pāvisīti gandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi. Ettakaṃ kathetvāti kappaparicchedādinavavārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃ buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ettāvatā desanaṃ desetvā. Kasmā panettha bhagavā vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃyeva buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi, na buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ (bu. vaṃ. 64 gāthādayo) viya pañcavīsatiyā buddhānaṃ, tato vā pana bhiyyoti? Anadhikārato, payojanābhāvato ca. Buddhavaṃsadesanāyañhi (bu. vaṃ. 75) –
大雄啊,人中最胜者,你的大誓愿是怎样的?
勇士啊,您在什么时候发愿求取无上菩提?巴利
‘‘Kīdiso te mahāvīra, abhinīhāro naruttama; Kamhi kāle tayā vīra, patthitā bodhimuttamā’’ti. ādinā –
这段问话被当作机缘和事由之后,先说菩萨曾在其足下发下大誓愿的那位正自觉者:从燃灯世尊开始,他在二十四位佛陀面前获得菩提授记,并在各处圆满种种巴拉密——这些佛陀所行的宿住,以及他自己所行之道,都已讲述。但在这里,并没有那样的机缘,可以从燃灯佛或更早的佛陀说起,来讲述宿住。所以,这里不像《佛种姓经》那样详细展开宿住。而且,佛陀说法是随顺所教化众生的智慧力量,不是随顺佛陀自己的智慧力量。因此在《佛种姓经》里,说法是以上首弟子、大弟子以及那样的天众和梵天神众为主而详细展开的。但在这里,世尊以普通弟子和那样的天众为主讲述宿住,所以只说了七位佛陀的宿住。正因为这样,世尊为了用能吸引他们的方式激励他们,以带有种种分别的说法,还没把开示讲到顶点,就进入了香室。也正因随顺这一开示,后来才出现了《阿塔那帝亚护卫经》等开示。巴利
Pavattaṃ taṃ pucchaṃ adhikāraṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā yassa sammāsambuddhassa pādamūle attanā mahābhinīhāro kato, taṃ dīpaṅkaraṃ bhagavantaṃ ādiṃ katvā yesaṃ catuvīsatiyā buddhānaṃ santikā bodhiyā laddhabyākaraṇo hutvā tattha tattha pāramiyo pūresi, tesaṃ paṭipattisaṅkhāto pubbenivāso, attano ca paṭipatti kathitā, idha pana tādiso adhikāro natthi , yena dīpaṅkarato paṭṭhāya, tato vā pana purato buddhe ārabbha pubbenivāsaṃ katheyya. Tasmā na ettha buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ viya pubbenivāso vitthārito. Yasmā ca buddhānaṃ desanā nāma desanāya bhājanabhūtānaṃ puggalānaṃ ñāṇabalānurūpā, na attano ñāṇabalānurūpā, tasmā tattha aggasāvakānaṃ, mahāsāvakānaṃ, (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) tādisānañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena desanā vitthāritā. Idha pana pakatisāvakānaṃ, tādisānañca devatānaṃ vasena pubbenivāsaṃ kathento sattannameva buddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi. Tathā hi ne bhagavā palobhanavasena samuttejetuṃ sappapañcatāya kathāya desanaṃ matthakaṃ apāpetvāva gandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi. Tathā ca imissā eva desanāya anusārato āṭānāṭiyaparitta- (dī. ni. 3.275) desanādayo pavattā.
另外,在这里,世尊为了配合后面那段说明自己游历净居天的教说,只讲了维巴斯等七位正自觉者的宿命。因为只有这七位佛陀的声闻弟子,不论那时还是现在,都还住在净居天;别的佛陀的弟子已经般涅槃,所以不在那里。有人说:“悉达多佛、帝萨佛、普萨佛的弟子们投生到净居天后,刚投生就证得阿拉汉果,就像这个教法中的伍巴咖等人一样,不久就般涅槃了,并没有在那里各处住满寿命。”同样,对于那些正自觉者的证悟教法至今仍然确定无疑、还没有消失的,世尊为了称扬他们,就随顺所化众生的意乐,在这部经里只讲了维巴斯等世尊的宿命。至于“诸佛成佛没有先后固定的次序”,那是就一个世界中众生辗转轮回的情况而说的,和这里并不矛盾,应当这样理解。“无间而达到顶点”是说:从出身开始,一直到诵出巴帝摩卡,直到佛事圆满成就,一直达到最高峰、最顶端。“还没有说到”则是这样衔接:还没有说到那个程度。巴利
Apicettha bhagavā attano suddhāvāsacārikāvibhāviniyā uparidesanāya saṅgahatthaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ eva sattannaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ kathesi. Tesaṃyeva hi sāvakā tadā ceva etarahi ca suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā, na aññesaṃ parinibbutattā. ‘‘Siddhatthatissaphussānaṃ kira buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu upapannā upapattisamanantarameva imasmiṃ sāsane upakādayo viya arahattaṃ adhigantvā nacirasseva parinibbāyiṃsu, na tattha tattha yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhaṃsū’’ti vadanti. Tathā yesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ paṭivedhasāsanaṃ ekaṃsato nicchaye na ajjāpi dharati, na antarahitaṃ, te eva kittento vipassīādīnaṃyeva bhagavantānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ imasmiṃ sutte kathesi veneyyajjhāsayavasena. Apubbācarimaniyamo pana aparāparaṃ saṃsaraṇakasattavāsavasena ekissā lokadhātuyā icchitoti na tenetaṃ virujjhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirantaraṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvāti abhijātito paṭṭhāya yāva pātimokkhuddeso yāva tā buddhakiccasiddhi, tāva matthakaṃ sikhaṃ pāpetvā. Na tāva kathitoti yojanā.
所谓“法脉”,就是法的传承,也就是教法的意思。为了阐明“儿子、儿子之母、车乘、寺院、财施寺院、施者”等众多含义而展开的段落,就叫作“众多段落”。巴利
Tantinti dhammatantiṃ, pariyattinti attho. Puttaputtamātuyānavihāradhanavihāradāyakādīnaṃ sambahulānaṃ atthānaṃ vibhāvanavasena pavattavāro sambahulavāro.
对“众多段落”的注释巴利
Sambahulavāravaṇṇanā
这一段虽然在巴利经文中没有出现,但因为注疏里有提到,所以应当引出来加以说明。为了说明这一点,论师说了“以一切菩萨……”等话作为开头。“家族传承”就是家族血统的次第。“传统”就是相续。问了“为什么”会有儿子出生这个原因之后,论师用“以一切知菩萨……”等话来回答,以此表明:菩萨们出生的城市等之所以被人知道,正是为了让人确定地了解他们确实是人;否则,所期望的佛陀事业就无法成就。这是因为,大士们在最后一生只会出现在人间,不会出现在别的地方。巴利
Kāmañcāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ anāgato, aṭṭhakathāsu āgatattā pana ānetvā dīpetabboti taṃ dīpento ‘‘sabbabodhisattānañhī’’tiādimāha. Kulavaṃso kulānukkamo. Paveṇīti paramparā. ‘‘Kasmā’’ti puttuppattiyā kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā taṃ vissajjento ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattānañhī’’tiādimāha, tena tesaṃ jātanagarādi paññāyamānaṃ ekaṃsato manussabhāvasañjānanatthaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā yathādhippetabuddhakiccasiddhi eva na siyāti dasseti, yato mahāsattānaṃ carimabhave manussaloke eva pātubhāvo, na aññattha.
众多部分的注释巴利
Sambahulaparicchedavaṇṇanā
罗睺的意思是:他夺走并使人舍弃月亮等天体的光辉,所以叫罗睺,也就是“罗睺的抓取”。但在这里,是打比方说他像罗睺一样,所以叫罗睺。至于“束缚”,是就它是无益之事产生的地方来说的。同样,大家只是拿大士自己说过的话,给这个男孩取名叫“罗睺罗”。“Atha”只是个语气词。“Rocinī”的意思是,她有照耀的习性,也就是形体光明的意思。“Rucaggatī”的意思是,她达到了像晨光一样的光辉;这个词是加了一个ga音来说的。因为她是女宝,在人间所有女人当中,她遮蔽了她们的形相,所以叫频婆。巴利
Candādīnaṃ sobhāvisesaṃ raheti cajāpetīti rāhu, rāhuggaho, idha pana rāhu viyāti rāhu. Bandhananti ca anatthuppattiṭṭhānataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā mahāsattena vuttavacanameva gahetvā kumārassa ‘‘rāhulo’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Athāti nipātamattaṃ. Rocinīti rocanasīlā, ujjalarūpāti attho. Rucaggatīti rucaṃ pabhātaṃ āgatibhūtā, ga-kārāgamaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Itthiratanabhāvato manussaloke sabbāsaṃ itthīnaṃ bimbapaṭicchannabhūtāti bimbā.
从禅那生起,即从基础禅那生起。巴利
Jhānā vuṭṭhāyāti pādakajjhānato uṭṭhāya.
“八指高”是指厚度有八个手指那么厚。“以横边覆盖”是指横向铺开,把整个精舍场地都盖住。“用犁头大小的金杖”是指用犁头大小的金杖。“金象足”是指和普通象足一样大小的金块。“如前所述”就是指同样以横边。“用金片”是指用金块。“具有相”是指具备相好的千辐轮。巴利
Aṭṭhaṅgulubbedhāti aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇabahalabhāvā. Cūḷaṃsena chādetvāti tiriyabhāgena ṭhapanavasena sabbaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ chādetvā. Suvaṇṇayaṭṭhiphālehīti phālappamāṇāhi suvaṇṇayaṭṭhīhi. Suvaṇṇahatthipādānīti pakatihatthipādaparimāṇāni suvaṇṇakhaṇḍāni. Vuttanayenevāti cūḷaṃseneva. Suvaṇṇakaṭṭīhīti suvaṇṇakhaṇḍehi. Salakkhaṇānanti lakkhaṇasampannānaṃ sahassārānaṃ.
菩提座:指成正觉时坐下的地方。不弃舍:因为诸佛成道时坐的地方不会转到别处去,所以不曾被舍弃。因此说“总是在同一个地方”。第一脚结:指站在最后一级台阶上,安放右脚时脚所踏的地方。不过,因为那个地方坚固、稳定,任何东西都破坏不了,所以叫“脚结”。在如今祇园精舍所在的那片地面上,过去一切诸佛铺设床座的那个地方,我们的世尊也是在同一个位置铺设床座,因此说“四个床脚的位置从不被舍弃”。不过,床有大有小,铺设床座所占的地方也就有大有小,并不固定;但靠佛陀的威神力,那个地方永远保持同样的大小,所以说“四个床脚的位置从不被舍弃”,应当这样理解。精舍也同样不被舍弃,这里的道理也是一样。意思就是,不舍弃先前精舍所在的位置。巴利
Bodhipallaṅkoti abhisambujjhanakāle nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijahitoti buddhānaṃ tathānisajjāya anaññatthabhāvībhāvato apariccatto. Tenāha ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne hotī’’ti. Paṭhamapadagaṇṭhikāti pacchime sopānaphalake ṭhatvā ṭhapiyamānassa dakkhiṇapādassa patiṭṭhahanaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā daḷhaṃ thiraṃ kenaci abhejjaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘padagaṇṭhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ bhūmibhāge idāni jetavanamahāvihāro, tattha yasmiṃ ṭhāne purimānaṃ sabbabuddhānaṃ mañcā paññattā, tasmiṃyeva padese amhākampi bhagavato mañco paññattoti katvā ‘‘cattāri mañcapādaṭṭhānāni avijahitāneva hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mañcānaṃ pana mahantakhuddakabhāvena mañcapaññāpanapadesassa mahantāmahantatā appamāṇaṃ, buddhānubhāvena pana so padeso sabbadā ekappamāṇoyeva hotīti ‘‘cattāri mañcapādaṭṭhānāni avijahitāneva hontī’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vihāropi na vijahito yevāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Purimaṃ vihāraṭṭhānaṃ na pariccajatīti hi attho.
“差别”是指不同的程度,也就是差异,意思是不相似。“量度”是指身高。“精勤”是指苦行。“光”是指身体发出的光。巴利
Visiṭṭhā mattā vimattā, vimattāva vemattaṃ, visadisatāti attho. Pamāṇaṃ āroho. Padhānaṃ dukkarakiriyā. Rasmīti sarīrappabhā.
有人说:按常人的手来量,中等身材的人有六肘高,世尊的身量是这的三倍,所以世尊有十八肘高。另一些人则说:按常人的手来量,中等身材的人有四肘高,世尊的身量是这的三倍,所以世尊已执取的色身有十二肘高;而世尊周身散发一寻长的身光,向上高出六肘,那更浓厚的光与色身合在一起,就成了十八肘。巴利
‘‘Sattānaṃ pākatikahatthena chahattho majjhimapuriso, tato tiguṇaṃ bhagavato sarīrappamāṇanti bhagavā aṭṭhārasahattho’’ti vadanti. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘manussānaṃ pākatikahatthena catuhattho majjhimapuriso, tato tiguṇaṃ bhagavato sarīrappamāṇanti bhagavā dvādasahattho upādinnakarūpadhammavasena, samantato pana byāmamattaṃ byāmappabhā pharatīti upari chahatthaṃ abbhuggato, bahalatarappabhā rūpena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasahattho hotī’’ti.
“长久”是指很长的时间。巴利
Addhaniyanti dīghakālaṃ.
“系属于志趣”的意思是:在积累菩提资粮的时期,它取决于当时生起的志趣,与当时生起的愿求相应,是广大的,而且更加广大。这一含义应当依照《行藏注》中所说的方式来了知。在这里,因为诸佛的身量、精进力和身光各不相同,而这些在这段经文里并没有提到,所以就连同它们一起,把寿命和种姓也引出来加以说明,以显示它们在差异性和共通性上的关系。“于诸所通达的功德”:指所证得的一切知智等功德。有人会问:在菩提资粮和所度众生的数量上,难道诸佛之间就没有差异吗?确实没有差异,但这两者已经被“佛陀功德”这一说法涵盖进去了,所以没有单独提出来。因为,从一切诸佛的佛陀功德没有差异这一点来说,他们为证得正觉所积累的资粮也没有差异。为什么呢?因为果与因相应。而在所度众生的数量上,则绝对显示出差异。这是因为,大菩萨们在因地修行时,那些所度众生所积累的助缘和根性已经成熟,到了最后一生,为了证得阿拉汉果而得到培育,就像莲花池受到阳光照射而绽放一样,他们因如来功德之力的触动而觉悟。注疏师们就是这样说明的。巴利
Ajjhāsayapaṭibaddhanti bodhisambhārasambharaṇakāle tathāpavattajjhāsayādhīnaṃ, tathāpavattapatthanānurūpaṃ vipulaṃ, vipulatarañca hotīti attho. Svāyamattho cariyāpiṭakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ettha ca yasmā sarīrappamāṇaṃ, padhānaṃ, sarīrappabhā ca buddhānaṃ visadisāti idha pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā, tasmā tehi saddhiṃ vemattatāsāmaññena āyukulānipi idha āharitvā dīpitāni. Paṭividdhaguṇesūti adhigatasabbaññuguṇesu. Nanu ca bodhisambhāresu, veneyyapuggalaparimāṇe ca vemattaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, tadubhayaṃ pana buddhaguṇaggahaṇena gahitameva hotīti na uddhaṭaṃ. Yadaggena hi sabbabuddhānaṃ buddhaguṇesu vemattaṃ natthi, tadaggena nesaṃ sambodhisambhāresupi vemattaṃ natthīti. Kasmā? Hetuanurūpatāya phalassa , ekanteneva veneyyapuggalaparimāṇe vemattabhāvo vibhāvito. Mahābodhisattānañhi hetuavatthāyaṃ sambhatūpanissayindriyaparipākā veneyyapuggalā carimabhave arahattasampattiyā paripositāni kamalavanāni sūriyarasmisamphassena viya tathāgataguṇānubhāvasamphassena vibodhaṃ upagacchantīti dīpesuṃ aṭṭhakathācariyā.
“宝藏瓶”是指四种大宝藏而说的。“已出生”呢,通过这个“且”字,也把“已发起大愿”这层意思包含进去了,应当这样理解。因为这在《佛种姓》中已经说过:巴利
Nidhikumbhoti cattāro mahānidhayo sandhāya vadati. Jāto cāti. Ca-saddena katamahābhinīhāro cāti ayampi attho saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ buddhavaṃse –
“ 群星闪耀,星宿在天空中放光。
毗舍佉星与月亮相合之时,他必定会成为佛陀。”巴利
‘‘Tārāgaṇā virocanti, nakkhattā gaganamaṇḍale; Visākhā candimāyuttā, dhuvaṃ buddho bhavissatī’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 65);
他们也这样说:正是因为这个毗舍佉星宿,一切诸佛的大愿才得以发起。巴利
‘‘Eteneva ca sabbabuddhānaṃ visākhānakkhatteneva mahābhinīhāro hotī’’ti ca vadanti.
13 “这是去向”说的是:这种转起、这种运作方式。其他人随念宿命时,就是以这种方式随念的,这是这句话的意思。因为从死亡开始一直到结生,这期间的随念是向上追溯——智慧以面向过去的方式,在过去、更过去、最过去等种种被称为宿命的过去生中运作。因此,从结生开始一直到死亡,这期间的随念是向下追溯——智慧以背向过去的方式在宿命中运作,所以注释师说“把智慧送向背后”。“应被死所去”的意思是:这个应当由死的智慧之行所去的“去”,就是“觉了”的意思。“沉重”就是繁重、极难做到。因此注释师说“就像在虚空中留下脚印一样”。“另一个原因”是说:相比于把背向背后的智慧送去随念那已被斩断的轮回,这是另一个更稀奇、更令人惊叹的原因。“在此处”是“于自身”的意思,“名为”是表示惊奇的语气词,“确实”这个词没有实际意义。因此注释师说“那位名为如来者”。这样理解之后,“在此处”一词作为语气词被单独取出,其用意就得以成立。“使蔓延”是说使众生的相续在轮回中扩展,所以叫“戏论”。说“业轮”,是因为以“戏论”摄取了烦恼轮,以“苦”摄取了果报轮。“已尽轮”就是完全灭尽了轮转。说了“以道戒、果戒”之后,为了显示这道果之戒是以世间戒为前提的,而诸佛的世间戒也像出世间戒一样是不共的,所以又说“以世间、出世间戒”。定和慧也是这样。“定相应”就是定以及定相应法,应当理解为部分同体的省略说法。因此注释师说“以道定”等,以及“或取住处”。“定相应”指的是精进、念等。巴利
13.Ayaṃgatīti ayaṃ pavatti pavattanākāro, aññe pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantā iminā ākārena anussarantīti attho, yasmā cutito paṭṭhāya yāva paṭisandhi, tāva anussaraṇaṃ ārohanaṃ atītaatītataraatītatamādijātisaṅkhāte pubbenivāse ñāṇassa abhimukhabhāvena pavattīti katvā. Tasmā paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva cuti, tāva anussaraṇaṃ orohanaṃ pubbenivāse paṭimukhabhāvena ñāṇassa pavattīti āha ‘‘pacchāmukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā’’ti. Cutigantabbanti yaṃ panidaṃ cutiyā ñāṇagatiyā gantabbaṃ, taṃ gamanaṃ bujjhananti attho. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ dukkaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ākāse padaṃ dassento viyā’’ti. Aparampi kāraṇanti chinnavaṭumānussaraṇaṃ pacchāmukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesanato aparaṃ acchariyabbhutakāraṇaṃ. Yatrāti paccattatthe, nāmāti acchariyatthe nipāto, hi-saddo anatthako. Tenāha ‘‘yo nāma tathāgato’’ti. Evañca katvā ‘‘yatrā’’ti nipātavasena visuṃ yatra-saddaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Papañcenti sattasantānaṃ saṃsāre vitthārentīti papañcaṃ. Kammavaṭṭaṃ vuccatīti kilesavaṭṭassa papañcaggahaṇena, vipākavaṭṭassa dukkhaggahaṇena gahitattā. Pariyādinnavaṭṭeti sabbaso khepitavaṭṭe. ‘‘Maggasīlena phalasīlenā’’ti vatvā tayidaṃ maggaphalasīlaṃ lokiyasīlapubbakaṃ, buddhānañca lokiyasīlampi lokuttarasīlaṃ viya anaññasādhāraṇaṃ evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokiyalokuttarasīlenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samādhipaññāsupi eseva nayo. Samādhipakkhāti samādhi ca samādhipakkhā ca samādhipakkhā, ekadesasarūpekaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘maggasamādhinā’’tiādi, ‘‘vihāro gahito vā’’ti ca. Samādhipakkhā nāma vīriyasatiādayo.
他们说“自己”,就是由自己本身。从盖等法来说,就是从盖以及与盖同类的诸不善法,还有从寻、伺等法中脱离出来。“因为已解脱,所以被称为解脱”这句话,说明“解脱”这个词是取“由动作所成就的对象”这一含义,因为它的范围涵盖八等至等境界。而“因为已解脱”应当结合“由于以镇伏的方式而解脱”等来解释。“此、彼的”指的是属于无常随观等每一种观智的。“以敌对支的方面”就是以应当被断除的对立支分的方面来说。“因为在止息的边际而生起”的意思是:诸烦恼的完全止息就是“止息”,这止息本身就是边际、就是究竟;因为这些道智是在那应当成就的止息边际中生起的,所以它们是依着各道所应断除的烦恼被止息而转起的,这就是其含义。从诸烦恼中脱离出来,以及离去——因为涅槃与那些烦恼是远离的,所以他说“因为远离而安住”。巴利
Sayanti attanā. Nīvaraṇādīhīti nīvaraṇehi ceva tadekaṭṭhehi ca pāpadhammehi, vitakkavicārādīhi ca. ‘‘Vimuttattāvimuttīti saṅkhyaṃ gacchantī’’ti iminā vimutti-saddassa kammasādhanataṃ āha aṭṭhasamāpattiādivisayattā tassa. Vimuttattāti ca ‘‘vikkhambhanavasena vimuttattā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Tassa tassāti aniccānupassanādikassa. Paccanīkaṅgavasenāti pahātabbapaṭipakkhaaṅgavasena. Paṭippassaddhante uppannattāti kilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanaṃ paṭippassaddhaṃ, so eva anto pariyosānabhāvato, tasmiṃ sādhetabbe nibbattattā, taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ paṭippassambhanavasena pavattattāti attho. Kilesehi nissaṭatā, apagamo ca nibbānassa tehi vivittattā evāti āha ‘‘dūre ṭhitattā’’ti.
16 “法界”是指诸法的自性,从含义上来说就是四圣谛。“善通达”是指彻底地通达,因为断除了一切烦恼连同它们的习气。正是由于这样,一切知智、十力智等所有佛陀的功德,都被世尊证得了。有些人说,“法界”指的是阿拉汉果。另一些人说,指的是一切知智。“以两句”是指以两个句子。“系属”是指连接、关联,因为接下来的教说是以它为基础的。“天宫游行的喧嚷”是指在经文结尾处,他将通过展示自己在天界游历时,净居天诸天中出现的喧嚷之事,对此进行审察和阐明其含义。应当这样理解。“这一教说”是指从“诸比丘,从此……”等开始详细展开的教说。“在因缘品中”等是指一开始宣说的略说教说。因为它对于这一教说来说相当于因缘的所在,所以那样说。巴利
16.Dhammadhātūti dhammānaṃ sabhāvo, atthato cattāri ariyasaccāni. Suppaṭividdhāti suṭṭhu paṭividdhā savāsanānaṃ sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ pajahanato. Evañhi sabbaññutā, dasabalañāṇādayo cāti sabbe buddhaguṇā bhagavatā adhigatā ahesuṃ. Arahattaṃ dhammadhātūti keci. Sabbaññutañāṇanti apare. Dvīhi padehīti dvīhi vākyehi. Ābaddhanti paṭibaddhaṃ taṃmūlakattā uparidesanāya. Devacārikakolāhalanti attano devaloke cārikāyaṃ suddhāvāsadevānaṃ kutūhalappavattiṃ dassento suttantapariyosāne (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.91) vicāressati, atthato vibhāvessatīti yojanā. Ayaṃ desanāti ‘‘ito so bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.4) vitthārato pavattitadesanamāha. Nidānakaṇḍetiādito desitaṃ uddesadesanamāha. Sā hi imissā desanāya nidānaṭṭhāniyattā tathā vuttā.
菩萨法性注释巴利
Bodhisattadhammatāvaṇṇanā
17 说了“维巴斯是他的名字”之后,为了说明这个名字的含义,接着说了“那确实……”等话。“种种义”:对于隐藏的、在遥远地方的、已经到达的等等,按青、黄等颜色来分有种种不同;还有那些不同于此的、属于感官对象的事物,以及它们各自呈现的样子,再加上世俗判断中的情形,这些都是种种不同的意义。“观察善巧”:就是以敏锐精湛的方式去看。如实觉知所应了知的,就是“菩提”;而他因为与众生相联结,所以被称为“菩萨”,因此说“慧者、能觉者”。不过,若仅凭善思惟等来说他是慧者,那其实没有什么可多说的。然而,当他发下大誓愿之后,从那时起就一直只倾心于大菩提,所以说“于名为菩提等中”等等。道智是遍知智的所依,遍知智是道智的所依,这两者都称为“菩提”。用“具念、正知”这句话,显示他是以第四种入胎方式进入母胎的。入胎共有四种:有些人入胎、住胎、出胎这三个阶段都不能正知;有些人入胎时能正知,其余两个阶段不能;有些人入胎和住胎这两个阶段能正知,出胎时不能;还有些人三个阶段全都能正知。其中,第一种入胎是就世间一般人说的;第二种是就八十位大弟子说的;第三种是就两位上首弟子和独觉佛说的。据说他们被业生之风倒转,头朝下脚朝上,像被扔进几百人深的悬崖一样被抛向产道口,又像大象从锁孔里挤出来一样,从狭窄的产道口出来时遭受极大痛苦,因此他们没有“我们正在出来”的正知。第四种是就一切知菩萨说的。他们在母胎中结生时就能觉知,住在胎中时也能觉知,出胎时同样能觉知。因为业生之风无法把他们倒转抛出,他们是伸出双手、睁开双眼、站着出来的。“以智辨别”:就是在前期以五大观察智,以及“我现在要死了”的临死辨别智;在后期以“我在这里结生了”的结生辨别智,来辨明、了知。巴利
17. ‘‘Vipassīti tassa nāma’’nti vatvā tassa anvatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tañca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vividhe attheti tirohitavidūradesagatādike nīlādivasena nānāvidhe, tadaññe ca indriyagocarabhūte te ca yathūpagate, vohāravinicchaye cāti nānāvidhe atthe. Passanakusalatāyāti dassane nipuṇabhāvena. Yāthāvato ñeyyaṃ bujjhatīti bodhi, so eva sattayogato bodhisattoti āha ‘‘paṇḍitasatto bujjhanakasatto’’ti. Sucintitacintitādinā pana paṇḍitabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Yadā ca panānena mahābhinīhāro kato, tato paṭṭhāya mahābodhiyaṃ ekantaninnattā bodhimhi satto bodhisattoti āha ‘‘bodhisaṅkhātesū’’tiādi. Maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi sabbaññutañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca maggañāṇaṃ ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Sato sampajāno’’ti iminā catutthāya gabbhāvakkantiyā okkamīti dasseti. Catasso hi gabbhāvakkantiyo idhekacco gabbho mātukucchiyaṃ okkamane, ṭhāne, nikkhamaneti tīsu ṭhānesu asampajāno hoti, ekacco paṭhame ṭhāne sampajāno, na itaresu, ekacco paṭhame, dutiye ca ṭhāne sampajāno, na tatiye, ekacco tīsupi ṭhānesu sampajāno hoti. Tattha paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti lokiyamahājanassa vasena vuttā, dutiyā asītimahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.21 vaṅgīsattheragāthāvaṇṇanāya vitthāro) vasena, tatiyā dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ, paccekabuddhānañca vasena. Te kira kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā anekasataporise papāte viya yonimukhe khittā tāḷacchiggaḷena hatthī viya sambādhena yonimukhena nikkhamantā mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti, tena nesaṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nikkhamāmā’’ti sampajaññaṃ na hoti. Catutthā sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ vasena. Te hi mātukucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantāpi pajānanti, tattha vasantāpi pajānanti, nikkhamanakālepi pajānanti. Na hi te kammajavātā uddhaṃpāde adhosire katvā khipituṃ sakkonti, dve hatthe pasāritvā akkhīni ummīletvā ṭhitakāva nikkhamantīti. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti pubbabhāge pañcamahāvilokanañāṇehi ceva ‘‘idāni cavāmī’’ti cutiparicchindanañāṇena ca aparabhāge ‘‘idha mayā paṭisandhi gahitā’’ti paṭisandhiparicchindanañāṇena ca paricchijja jānitvā.
虽然五大舍和亲族利益行等本来就已经包含在巴拉密里面,但为了显示它们是资粮中特别殊胜的部分,所以另外单独提出来。其中,舍肢体、舍眼睛、舍自身、舍王国、舍妻儿,这五种就是五大舍。在这里,虽然舍肢体等本质上就是布施巴拉密,但为了显示舍的殊胜性和极难行的特点,还是把五大舍单独列出来。正因为这样,除了舍肢体之外,又另外提出舍眼睛;虽然同样都是舍,还是把舍王国和舍妻儿单独提出来。亲族利益行,就是为亲族做利益之事,而且是依于悲悯而行。同样地,为有情世间,依现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益而行利益之事,就是世间利益行。依于业自性智,依于无过失的业处、工巧处和明处,依于蕴、处等,依于对三相等的思择,对自己和他人以念处为基础而行的智行,就是佛行。这佛行,从究竟意义上说就是智慧巴拉密,但为了显示智资粮的特别殊胜,所以另外单独提出来。佛行这个词用复数来说,应当理解为包含了前分修行、前行之行和说法等。其中,和称为去而复返的前分行道一起成就神通与等至,就是前分修行。在布施等当中特别殊胜的行持,就是前行之行。有人说:凡是收进行藏论里的决意,是前分修行;依身远离等而行单一之行,是前行之行。依于阐明布施等以及少欲等,以及轮回与涅槃中的过患与利益,为使有情安立于三菩提并成熟而进行的说法,就是说法。到达顶点,就是达到最上、最极、最胜。七大布施:在八岁时,生起连心脏肉等也愿意施给乞者的心而作的布施;吉祥象布施;出行时所施的七次七日的布施;行路时所施的马布施;车乘布施;儿子布施;妻子布施,这七种大布施(见行藏79),他施与了。巴利
Pañcannaṃ mahāpariccāgānaṃ, ñātatthacariyādīnañca satipi pāramiyā pariyāpannabhāve sambhāravisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tattha aṅgapariccāgo, nayanapariccāgo, attapariccāgo, rajjapariccāgo, puttadārapariccāgoti ime pañca mahāpariccāgā. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ aṅgapariccāgādayopi dānapāramīyeva, tathāpi pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca mahāpariccāgānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tato eva ca aṅgapariccāgatopi visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi rajjapariccāgaputtadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sā ca kho karuṇāyanavasena. Tathā sattalokassa diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena hitacariyā lokatthacariyā. Kammassakatāñāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭhānavasena, khandhāyatanādivasena, lakkhaṇattayāditīraṇavasena ca attano, paresañca tattha satipaṭṭhānena ñāṇacāro buddhacariyā, sā panatthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāravisesatādassanatthaṃ pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Buddhacariyānanti bahuvacananiddesena pubbayogapubbacariyādhammakkhānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha gatapaccāgatavattasaṅkhātāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo. Dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipatti pubbacariyā. ‘‘Yāva cariyāpiṭake saṅgahitā abhinīhāro pubbayogo, kāyādivivekavasena ekacariyā pubbacariyā’’ti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsānañca vibhāvanavasena, sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena ca pavattakathā dhammakkhānaṃ. Koṭiṃ patvāti paraṃ pariyantaṃ paramukkaṃsaṃ pāpuṇitvā. Sattamahādānānīti aṭṭhavassikakāle ‘‘hadayamaṃsādīnipi yācakānaṃ dadeyya’’nti ajjhāsayaṃ uppādetvā dinnadānaṃ, maṅgalahatthidānaṃ, gamanakāle dinnaṃ sattasattakamahādānaṃ, maggaṃ gacchantena dinnaṃ assadānaṃ, rathadānaṃ, puttadānaṃ, bhariyādānanti imāni satta mahādānāni (cariyā. 79) datvā.
就在此刻让我死掉,这样下定决心之后便命终,这叫“决意命终”,只有菩萨才有,别人没有。据说,菩萨住在长寿天界时,心想:“我待在这里,没法圆满积聚菩提资粮。”于是对那里的生活感到厌离。那时,他们进入天宫,闭上双眼,下定决心坐着,心里作意:“从今以后,我的命不要再延续下去。”就在心下定决心的当下,立刻便死了。因为菩萨的巴拉密法已经达到极致,在每一生中,他们的心相续都因神通与等至而变得殊胜,对自身的贪爱极其微薄,而对众生的大悲却极为广大,所以他们的决意变得锐利明澈,菩萨的心愿总能实现。他们在心和业上都得到了自在,因此无论投生到哪里,巴拉密都能真正地增长。他们按前面说的方式命终,然后投生到那里。就像我们的大菩萨,就在这个大劫中,在种种不同的生命形态里,不失禅那而命终,投生到梵天界,在那里只住了很短的时间,就从那里死去,再投生到人间,专心致志地积集巴拉密。因此才说“只有菩萨才有,别人没有”。经文说“只隔一个结生身,巴拉密就圆满了”,这说明:因为住在那个长寿天对圆满巴拉密没有帮助,所以没有那个必要,因此住在那里而作决意命终的事并不存在。另外,在这里应当知道:在最后一生中,在寿命未尽之前,就像许多大宝藏同时涌现一样,生起与天界福乐相似的大福乐,以及成佛之后,以无与伦比的布施等方式获得不共于他人的殊胜利养,这些都是因为那位大士心想“从此以后再也没有天界福乐的享受了”而发起精进,依靠福德资粮的力量而成就的。这就是这里的法性。巴利
‘‘Idāneva me maraṇaṃ hotū’’ti adhimuccitvā kālakaraṇaṃ adhimuttikālakiriyā, taṃ bodhisattānaṃyeva, na aññesaṃ. Bodhisattā kira dīghāyukadevaloke ṭhitā ‘‘idha ṭhitassa me bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ na sambhavatī’’ti katvā tattha vāsato nibbindamānasā honti, tadā vimānaṃ pavisitvā akkhīni nimīletvā ‘‘ito uddhaṃ me jīvitaṃ nappavattatū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisīdanti, cittādhiṭṭhānasamanantarameva maraṇaṃ hoti. Pāramīdhammānañhi ukkaṃsappavattiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve abhiññāsamāpattīhi santānassa visesitattā attasinehassa tanubhāvena, sattesu ca mahākaruṇāya uḷārabhāvena adhiṭṭhānassa tikkhavisadabhāvāpattiyā bodhisattānaṃ adhippāyā samijjhanti. Citte, viya kammesu ca nesaṃ vasībhāvo, tasmā yattha upapannānaṃ pāramiyo sammadeva paribrūhanti. Vuttanayena kālaṃ katvā tattha upapajjanti. Tathā hi amhākaṃ mahāsatto imasmiṃyeva kappe nānājātīsu aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbatto, appakameva kālaṃ tattha ṭhatvā tato cavitvā manussaloke nibbatto, pāramīsambharaṇapasuto ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bodhisattānaṃyeva, na aññesa’’nti. ‘‘Ekenaattabhāvena antarena pāramīnaṃ sabbaso pūritattā’’ti iminā payojanābhāvato tattha ṭhatvā adhimuttikālakiriyā nāma nāhosīti dasseti. Api ca tattha yāvatāyukaṭṭhānaṃ carimabhave anekamahānidhisamuṭṭhānapubbikāya dibbasampattisadisāya mahāsampattiyā nibbatti viya, buddhabhūtassa asadisadānādivasena anaññasādhāraṇalābhuppatti viya ca ‘‘ito paraṃ mahāpurisassa dibbasampattianubhavanaṃ nāma natthī’’ti ussāhajātassa puññasambhārassa vasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayañhettha dhammatā.
这是按人间的算法来说的,不是按天界的算法来说的。前兆:就是临死前出现的前兆。不枯萎:在这里,单凭“不枯萎”这一点,就应该知道,那些花鬘无论颜色、香气还是光泽,都没有变坏。因为天神的身体内外都没有尘垢沾染,所以穿在身上的衣服始终极其清净明亮,因此经文说“衣服方面也是这样”。不冷不热:如果为了对治寒冷而过度靠近热,或者热本身变得过于猛烈而压倒身体、让身体出汗,这种情况在这里都没有,所以说既不冷也不热。在那个时候:就是前面说的临近死亡的时候。一滴一滴地:就像串珠的线断了,珠子一颗一颗掉落那样,一滴一滴地。汗:汗液流出来。牙齿破碎,叫齿缺。头发变白,叫发白。用“等”这个字,还包括皮肤起皱。身体变得疲惫不堪,但并不是齿缺、发白等这些。厌离:就是不喜乐。这种不喜乐不存在,因为越来越殊胜、越来越微妙的种种享乐,尤其是那些很难察觉的享乐,不断出现在他面前。叹气:就是呼出热气。伸懒腰:因为不喜乐而伸懒腰。巴利
Manussagaṇanāvasena, na devagaṇanāvasena. Pubbanimittānīti cutiyā pubbanimittāni. Amilāyitvāti ettha amilātaggahaṇeneva tāsaṃ mālānaṃ vaṇṇasampadāyapi gandhasampadāyapi sobhāsampadāyapi avināso dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bāhirabbhantarānaṃ rajojallānaṃ lepassapi abhāvato devānaṃ sarīragatāni vatthāni sabbakālaṃ parisuddhappabhassarāneva hutvā tiṭṭhantīti āha ‘‘vatthesupi eseva nayo’’ti. Neva sītaṃ na uṇhanti yassa sītassa paṭikāravasena adhikaṃ seviyamānaṃ uṇhaṃ, sayameva vā kharataraṃ hutvā abhibhavantaṃ sarīre sedaṃ uppādeyya, tādisaṃ neva sītaṃ, na uṇhaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ kāleti yathāvuttamaraṇāsannakāle. Bindubinduvasenāti chinnasuttāya āmuttamuttāvaliyā nipatantā muttaguḷikā viya bindu bindu hutvā. Sedāti sedadhārā muccanti. Dantānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvo khaṇḍiccaṃ. Kesānaṃ palitabhāvo pāliccaṃ.Ādi-saddena valittacataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kilantarūpo attabhāvo hoti, na pana khaṇḍiccapāliccādīti adhippāyo. Ukkaṇṭhitāti anabhirati. Sā natthi uparūpari uḷārauḷārānameva bhogānaṃ visesato duvijānanānaṃ upatiṭṭhahanato. Nissasantīti uṇhaṃ nissasanti. Vijambhantīti anabhirativasena vijambhanaṃ karonti.
“即是智者”,就是指那些具足智慧的天神。就像有些天神刚一投生就能想:“我是凭着什么样的福业才生到这里的?”并且能知道:“我就是凭着这样的福业才生到这里的。”同样,那些大福德的天神,对自己过去世所造的业,或者对其他某些福业,也是能知道的,所以说“凡大福德者”等等。巴利
Paṇḍitā evāti buddhisampannā eva devatā. Yathā devatā sampatijātā ‘‘kīdisena puññakammena idha nibbattā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘iminā nāma puññakammena idha nibbattā’’ti jānanti, evaṃ atītabhave attanā kataṃ, aññadāpi vā ekaccaṃ puññakammaṃ jānantiyeva mahāpuññāti āha ‘‘ye mahāpuññā’’tiādi.
他们不显现,是因为寿命太长久了。“不能导出的”:意思是不能导向出离,因为众生不是能接受教法的根器。众生并非真的寿命极长,而是恶法增盛,所以说“那时众生烦恼增盛”。这里有人问:为什么正自觉者只出现在人界,不出现在天界或梵天界呢?先说天界:他们不出生在天界,因为那里没有修梵行的空间,也同样不显得稀奇。佛陀世尊是稀有之法,这种稀有法性如果以天身存在,就不像以人身存在那样明显。因为如果人们看到正自觉者以天身出现,会把所见的佛威神力归因于天神的威力,而不归因于佛的威神力;这样一来,就不能确信“这是正自觉者”,不能生起净信,也放不下“有主宰神”的执见;又因为天身能长久安住,有些人就摆脱不了一分常住论。不出生在梵天界,道理也是一样。为了让众生摆脱这类执取,佛陀世尊只降生在人善趣,不降生在天善趣。即使降生在人善趣,也不是化生。如果是化生,上面说的那些过失就无法避免;而且,为了让应受教化的众生安立在法轨中,就像把应受教化的众生安立在法的传承中一样,也应当为依舍利得度的化众留存舍利。因为化生者般涅槃之后,舍利是不会留下来的。大菩萨降生在人界时,在最后一生中,为了让人身的存在显得明显,也会娶妻,直到看见儿子之前都住在家里;即使戒、出离、智慧等巴拉密已经成熟,也不出家。何必再想这些道理呢?这是“一切佛陀所惯行、所共行”的规律,即:只有以人身才能证得正觉,不是以天身。这就是这里的法性。同样,为此目的而发的大誓愿,也只有在以人身时才能成就,不是以天身。巴利
Na paññāyanti ciratarakālattā paramāyuno. Aniyyānikanti na niyyānāvahaṃ sattānaṃ abhājanabhāvato. Sattā na paramāyuno honti nāma pāpussannatāyāti āha ‘‘tadā hi sattā ussannakilesā hontī’’ti. Etthāha – kasmā sammāsambuddhā manussaloke eva uppajjanti, na devabrahmalokesūti? Devaloke tāva nuppajjanti brahmacariyavāsassa anokāsabhāvato, tathā anacchariyabhāvato . Acchariyadhammā hi buddhā bhagavanto, tesaṃ sā acchariyadhammatā devattabhāve ṭhitānaṃ na pākaṭā hoti yathā manussabhūtānaṃ, devabhūte hi sammāsambuddhe dissamānaṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ devānubhāvato loko dahati, na buddhānubhāvato, tathā sati ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, issaraguttaggāhaṃ na vissajjeti, devattabhāvassa ca cirakālādhiṭṭhānato ekaccasassatavādato na parimuccati. Brahmaloke nuppajjantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sattānaṃ tādisaggāhavinimocanatthañhi buddhā bhagavanto manussasugatiyaṃyeva uppajjanti, na devasugatiyaṃ. Manussasugatiyaṃ uppajjantāpi opapātikā na honti, sati ca opapātikūpapattiyaṃ vuttadosānativattanato, dhammaveneyyānaṃ dhammatantiyā ṭhapanassa viya dhātuveneyyānaṃ dhātūnaṃ ṭhapanassa icchitabbattā ca. Na hi opapātikānaṃ parinibbānato uddhaṃ sarīradhātuyo tiṭṭhanti. Manussaloke uppajjantāpi mahābodhisattā carimabhave manussabhāvassa pākaṭabhāvakaraṇāya pana dārapariggahampi karontā yāva puttamukhadassanā agāramajjhe tiṭṭhanti, paripākagatasīlanekkhammapaññādipāramikāpi na abhinikkhamantīti. Kiṃ vā etāya kāraṇacintāya ‘‘sabbabuddhehi āciṇṇasamāciṇṇā, yadidaṃ manussabhūtānaṃyeva abhisambujjhanā, na devabhūtāna’’nti. Ayamettha dhammatā. Tathā hi tadattho mahābhinīhāropi manussabhūtānaṃyeva ijjhati, na devabhūtānaṃ.
为什么正自觉者只出现在赡部洲,不出现在其他洲呢?有些人说:“因为大地的中心、与佛力相应而不动摇的菩提道场就在赡部洲,所以正自觉者只出现在赡部洲。”也有人说:“因为其他不可舍离的处所也只有在赡部洲才能得到。”不过,在这个问题上,我们接受这样的看法:过去诸佛、大菩萨、独觉佛的出生,声闻菩萨对声闻菩提的发愿,声闻巴拉密的积集与成熟,都只有在作为佛土的这个世界中的赡部洲才能成就,在其他地方则不行。而且,佛陀出世是为了调伏应受教化的众生,这要观待上首弟子、大弟子等不同类别的应化对象,所以诸佛只出现在赡部洲,不出现在其他洲。这个规律是一切诸佛共同遵循的。应当知道,那些上等人物只出生在这里,就像成就之轮一样,彼此互为助缘,前后相续不断。由此也说明,以这个世界为中心,连同周围一万个世界,都是诸佛的教化区域,因为在三藏佛语中找不到此外还有诸佛出世之处的记载。因此有偈颂说:“诸佛不出生于三洲,唯在赡部洲出生”,由此可见。按照这个道理,关于教法限定方面,也应当推究其根据来加以说明。巴利
Kasmā pana sammāsambuddhā jambudīpe eva uppajjanti, na sesadīpesu? Keci tāva āhu ‘‘yasmā pathaviyā nābhibhūtā, buddhānubhāvasahitā acalaṭṭhānabhūtā bodhimaṇḍabhūmi jambudīpe eva, tasmā jambudīpe eva uppajjantī’’ti, tathā ‘‘itaresampi avijahitaṭṭhānānaṃ tattheva labbhanato’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – yasmā purimabuddhānaṃ, mahābodhisattānaṃ, paccekabuddhānañca nibbattiyā sāvakabodhisattānaṃ sāvakabodhiyā abhinīhāro, sāvakapāramiyā sambharaṇaṃ, paripācanañca buddhakhettabhūte imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe jambudīpe eva ijjhati, na aññattha. Veneyyānaṃ vinayanattho ca buddhuppādoti aggasāvakamahāsāvakādi veneyyavisesāpekkhāya etasmiṃ jambudīpe eva buddhā nibbattanti, na sesadīpesu. Ayañca nayo sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti. Tesaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ tattheva uppatti sampatticakkānaṃ viya aññamaññūpanissayato aparāparaṃ vattatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, eteneva imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ majjhe katvā iminā saddhiṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ dasasahassasseva khettabhāvo dīpito ito aññassa buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānassa tepiṭake buddhavacane anupalabbhanato. Tenāha ‘‘tīsu dīpesu buddhā na nibbattanti, jambudīpeyeva nibbattantīti dīpaṃ passī’’ti. Iminā nayena desaniyāmepi kāraṇaṃ nīharitvā vattabbaṃ.
这时,他观察族姓:刹帝利家族被世间公认尊贵,连婆罗门也要供养他们。他看见“父亲将会成为国王”,因为家族应当依据父系来认定。巴利
Idānica khattiyakulaṃ lokasammataṃ brāhmaṇānampi pūjanīyabhāvato. ‘‘Rājā pitā bhavissatī’’ti kulaṃ passi pituvasena kulassa niddisitabbato.
他观察到“十个月再加七天”,因此知道自己没有障碍,也明白她将在兜率天享受天界的殊胜福报。巴利
‘‘Dasannaṃ māsānaṃ upari satta divasānī’’ti passi, tena attano antarāyābhāvaṃ aññāsi, tassā ca tusitabhave dibbasampattipaccanubhavanaṃ.
那些天神,就是一万个轮围世界的天神。那么,那些天神当时怎么知道菩萨已经圆满诸巴拉密,又怎么知道他已成就佛果呢?这是依着有大威力的天神来说的,而且那些天神大多数都能证得现观。正因为如此,世尊在分施法施的时候,一万个轮围世界的天神曾多次聚集而来。巴利
Tā devatāti dasasahassicakkavāḷadevatā. Kathaṃ pana tā devatā tadā bodhisattassa pūritapāramibhāvaṃ, kathaṃ cassa buddhabhāvaṃ jānantīti? Mahesakkhānaṃ devatānaṃ vasena, yebhuyyena ca tā devatā abhisamayabhāgino. Tathā hi bhagavato dhammadānasaṃvibhāge anekavāraṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatāsannipāto ahosi.
他知道“我要死了”,是因为在临近死亡的速行心里,与智相应的速行已经清楚地觉知到死亡正在逼近。但他不知道死心本身,因为死心那一刹那实在太短暂了。也正因如此,死心连“死与结生智”都触及不到。结生心也是同样的道理。所谓“转向的次第”,就是转向的先后顺序。因为只转向一次无法确定所缘,所以要对同一个所缘作第二次、第三次转向,才能确定下来。这里是以转向为开头,连带取速行心路来说的。因此说“他将在第二、第三心路(此处“于彼时”指结生之时)”。从死亡之前若干心路开始,由于知道“死亡已临近我”,所以说“在死那一刹那也知道‘我要死了’”。然而,因为结生是没有前际的,所以不知道结生心。从渴爱生起之后,才知道“我在某处已取结生”。此处“于彼时”指取结生之时。十千世界震动,这里震动的因由已在前面《梵网经注》中说过。就义理而言,这里应当说的内容,将在后面《大般涅槃经注》中说到。大悲的诸佛世尊,由于致力于为众生谋求利益与安乐,多分是喜悦的,因此说他们以第一广大果报心取结生,这在义注中说过。然而大须长老则认为,大悲的诸佛世尊虽然致力于为众生谋求利益与安乐,但因志在远离、倾向无为,且多分对一切行舍置,所以说他们以第五广大果报心取结生。巴利
‘‘Cavāmī’’ti jānāti cutiāsannajavanehi ñāṇasahitehi cutiyā upaṭṭhitabhāvassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Cuticittaṃ na jānāti cuticittakkhaṇassa ittarabhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ cutūpapātañāṇassapi avisayova. Paṭisandhicittepi eseva nayo. Āvajjanapariyāyoti āvajjanakkamo. Yasmā ekavāraṃ āvajjitamattena ārammaṇaṃ nicchinituṃ na sakkā, tasmā taṃ evārammaṇaṃ dutiyaṃ, tatiyañca āvajjitvā nicchayati. Āvajjanasīsena cettha javanavāro gahito. Tenāha ‘‘dutiyatatiyacittavāre eva jānissatī’’ti. Cutiyā puretaraṃ katipayacittavārato paṭṭhāya ‘‘maraṇaṃ me āsanna’’nti jānanato ‘‘cutikkhaṇepi cavāmīti jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭisandhiyā pana apubbabhāvato paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti. Nikantiyā uppattito parato ‘‘asukasmiṃ me ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitā’’ti jānāti. Tasmiṃ kāleti paṭisandhiggahaṇakāle. Dasasahassilokadhātu kampatīti ettha kampanakāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.149) vuttameva. Atthato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato mahāparinibbānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.171) āgamissati. Mahākāruṇikā buddhā bhagavanto sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānatapparatāya bahulaṃ somanassikāva hontīti tesaṃ paṭhamamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.17; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.200) vuttaṃ. Mahāsivattheropana yadipi mahākāruṇikā buddhā bhagavanto sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānatapparāva, vivekajjhāsayā pana visaṅkhāraninnā sabbasaṅkhāresu ajjhupekkhanabahulāti pañcamamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiggahaṇamāha.
从满月之前第七天算起,意思是说,从白分第九天开始算起。所谓第七天,就是从第九天算起的第七天,也就是阿沙阇月的满月日。所谓此梦,就是现在所说的这种情形。不过《中部注》里说:天人们把菩萨带到阿耨达池,然后自己站在一旁。接着天女们前来,为了除去他身上人间的污垢而为他沐浴。那里说的天女,就是四大王天的天女。游行,就是在行境中游历之后。巴利
Pure puṇṇamāya sattamadivasato paṭṭhāyāti puṇṇamāya pure sattamadivasato paṭṭhāya, sukkapakkhe navamito paṭṭhāyāti attho. Sattame divaseti navamito sattame divase āsaḷhipuṇṇamāyaṃ. Idaṃ supinanti idāni vuccamānākāraṃ. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘anotattadahaṃ netvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ deviyo āgantvā manussamalaharaṇatthaṃ nhāpetvā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 4.200) vuttaṃ. Tattha nesaṃ deviyoti mahārājūnaṃ deviyo. Caritvāti gocaraṃ caritvā.
“涂了新鲜牛粪”:用新鲜牛粪涂抹装饰过。“那是个男胎,不是女胎,你会得个儿子”:婆罗门只凭自己那套解梦的说法,就讲了这么多。“如果他在家生活”等等,则是天神附体,把这件事如实说了出来。巴利
Haritūpalittāyāti haritena gomayena kataparibhaṇḍāya. ‘‘So ca kho purisagabbho, na itthigabbho, putto te bhavissatī’’ti ettakameva te brāhmaṇā attano supinasatthanayena kathesuṃ. ‘‘Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasissatī’’tiādi pana devatāviggahena tamatthaṃ yāthāvato pavedesuṃ.
“法性”在这里,“法”这个词,就像在“诸比丘,有生法的众生”等语句中那样,是“自然”的意思。法本身就是法性,就像天本身就是天众,所以说“这是自性”,意思是这是本性。而这自性,从义理上说就是如此决定的状态,所以说“这就叫作决定”。不过,决定有很多种,为了把那些全都按义理归纳提出来,只显示这里所指的决定,所以说了“决定又名为”等话。其中,业的决定就是业决定。在时决定等三种里也是同样的道理。另一种则是法本身就是决定,即法决定,也就是法性。巴利
Dhammatāti ettha dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ bhikkhave sattāna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) viya pakatipariyāyo, dhammo eva dhammatā yathā devo eva devatāti āha ‘‘ayaṃ sabhāvo’’ti, ayaṃ pakatīti attho. Svāyaṃ sabhāvo atthato tathā niyatabhāvoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ niyāmoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Niyāmo pana bahuvidhoti te sabbe atthuddhāranayena uddharitvā idhādhippetaniyāmameva dassetuṃ ‘‘niyāmo ca nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammānaṃ niyāmo kammaniyāmo. Esa nayo utuniyāmādīsu tīsu. Itaro pana dhammo eva niyāmo dhammaniyāmo, dhammatā.
磨砺善业,使之锋利。巴利
Kusalassa kammassa. Nisento tikhiṇaṃ karonto.
因为无色界等各地域的差别不同,所以能看出时节的差异;对于那些随着时节差异而长成的树木等,说到它们开花结果时,特别用“在各个不同的地方”来加以限定。所谓“在各个不同的时间”,就是指在各个不同的春季等时节。巴利
Arūpādibhūmibhāgavisesavasena utuvisesadassanato utuvisesena sijjhamānānaṃ rukkhādīnaṃ pupphaphalādiggahaṇaṃ ‘‘tesu tesu janapadesū’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāleti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vasantādikāle.
从甘甜的种子、从苦涩的种子,应当这样关联理解。巴利
Madhurato bījato tittato bījatoti yojanā.
18 正在发生的当下,可以像说“正在发生”那样来表述,所以说“进入”,意思就是“已经进入”。这样说的含义就是:以这种方式,他具备正知。并不是在正在入胎的结生刹那,因为结生刹那极难辨认。正如所说的:“不了知结生心。”又因为光明铺展到一万个轮围世界,所以是无量的;因为极其明亮,所以是殊胜的。天神的威力,就是诸天神光明的威德。因为那光明胜过了诸天神的光明,但并不是胜过他们的威权。因此说“如穿着新衣的人”等等。巴利
18. Vattamānasamīpe vattamāne viya voharitabbanti ‘‘okkamatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘okkanto hotīti ayamevattho’’ti. Evaṃ hotīti evaṃ vuttappakārenassa sampajānanā hoti. Na okkamamāne paṭisandhikkhaṇassa duviññeyyatāya. Yathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānātī’’ti. Dasasahassacakkavāḷapattharaṇena vā appamāṇo. Ativiya samujjalanabhāvena uḷāro. Devānubhāvanti devānaṃ pabhānubhāvaṃ. Devānañhi pabhaṃ so obhāso abhibhavati, na tesaṃ ādhipaccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivatthavatthassā’’tiādi.
世界与诸世界之间的空隙、裂缝,就是“世界之间”。这个空隙因为以阴性词来表达,所以被称为“世界中间”。那里没有任何树木、灌木等东西碰触或阻碍,所以叫“空旷”,也就是没有拥挤阻塞。因此经文说“永远敞开着”。“不被遮盖”,是说下方和上方都没有任何东西盖住它。因此经文说“下方也没有依托”。这里的“也”字,是要说明:就像下方没有大地盖住水一样,世界中间是不被遮盖的;同样,上方也不像诸轮围山那样有天神宫殿存在,所以它不被遮盖、没有依托。那里有黑暗,所以叫“黑暗”。因为完全没有光明,眼识不会生起,并不是因为没有眼睛。正如经文所说:“凭那种光明,他们互相辨认。”在赡部洲正午时分,东毗提诃的居民看到半个太阳正在落下,西牛货洲的居民看到半个太阳正在升起;其余各洲也是这样,所以说“三个洲同时都能看见”。如果不是这样,那就只有两个洲能同时看见了。每一个方向各有九十九万由旬的黑暗被驱散,这一点也应当按同样的道理来理解。“光芒不能充分照及”,是说它无法以自己的光明照亮那里。又因为它飞行在与轮围山等高的虚空中,所以经文说“在轮围山正中间游走”。巴利
Lokānaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antaro vivaro lokantaro, so eva itthiliṅgavasena ‘‘lokantarikā’’ti vutto. Rukkhagacchādinā kenaci na haññantīti aghā, asambādhā. Tenāha ‘‘niccavivaṭā’’ti. Asaṃvutāti heṭṭhā, upari ca kenaci na pihitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhāpi appatiṭṭhā’’ti. Tattha pi-saddena yathā heṭṭhā udakassa pidhāyikā pathavī natthīti asaṃvutā lokantarikā, evaṃ uparipi cakkavāḷesu viya devavimānānaṃ abhāvato asaṃvutā appatiṭṭhāti dasseti. Andhakāro ettha atthīti andhakārā. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati ālokassa abhāvato, na cakkhuno. Tathā hi ‘‘tena obhāsena aññamaññaṃ sañjānantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jambudīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, aparagoyānavāsīnaṃ uggamanavasena, evaṃ sesadīpesu pīti āha ‘‘ekappahāreneva tīsu dīpesu paññāyantī’’ti. Ito aññathā pana dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahārena paññāyantīti. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāravidhamanampi imināva nayena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pabhāya nappahontīti attano pabhāya obhāsituṃ anabhisambhunanti. Yugandharapabbatappamāṇe ākāse vicaraṇato ‘‘cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena vicarantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
正要伸手去抓来吃。“翻转”:就是倒转过来。“断除”:从昏厥的状态中脱出,或者因肢体关节被折断而分离。“极咸”:可能是就着没有烈日灼烤、极为寒冷这一点,才说它“极咸”。因为那劫初凝结的水,并不像成就暴雨时倾盆而下、支撑大地的大雨,也不像坏劫时毁灭大地的水那样咸。如果它真是那样咸,连大地都会融化。又或者,由于那些饿鬼恶业的力量,水在他们看来变成脓血一般,那时水就变成咸的了,因此经文说“在极咸的水中”。巴利
Vāvaṭāti khādanatthaṃ gaṇhituṃ upakkamantā. Viparivattitvāti vivattitvā. Chijjitvāti mucchāpattiyā ṭhitaṭṭhānato muccitvā, aṅgapaccaṅgachedanena vā chijjitvā. Accantakhāreti ātapasantāpābhāvena atisītabhāvameva sandhāya accantakhāratā vuttā siyā. Na hi taṃ kappasaṇṭhahanaudakaṃ sampattikaramahāmeghavuṭṭhaṃ pathavisandhārakaṃ kappavināsakaṃ udakaṃ viya khāraṃ bhavituṃ arahati. Tathā hi sati pathavīpi vilīyeyya, tesaṃ vā pāpakammabalena petānaṃ udakassa pubbakheḷabhāvāpatti viya tassa udakassa tadā khārabhāvāpatti hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘accantakhāre udake’’ti.
就算只是喝一口粥那么短的时间:指从钵等容器里取出粥,用gaḷoci等勺子舀取后,仅仅喝一口的工夫。从一切方面来说:就是从所有角度而言,六种情况也都是这样。巴利
Ekayāgupānamattampīti pattādibhājanagataṃ yāguṃ gaḷociādiuddharaṇiyā gahetvā pivanamattampi kālaṃ. Samantatoti sabbabhāgato chappakārampi.
19 以四大天王的权势来说:这是就多闻天王等四大天王共同具有大王身份而言的。巴利
19.Catunnaṃmahārājānaṃ vasenāti vessavaṇādicatumahārājabhāvasāmaññena.
各自依自己的住处而住。巴利
Yathāvihāranti yathāsakaṃ vihāraṃ.
20 “依本性”是指依自己的本性。因此说“以自体”。不靠从别人那里领受,只凭自己的本性,就能自己确立而戒行具足。“菩萨之母也是如此”:就是我们这位菩萨的母亲也是如此。“如同在迦罗迦仙人处”:就像在迦罗迦仙人那里,别的时候会从别人那里领受戒律,但就菩萨而言……菩萨是自己受持戒律的,维巴斯菩萨的母亲也是同样的情况——这就是要表达的意思。巴利
20.Pakatiyāti attano pakatiyā eva. Tenāha ‘‘sabhāvenevā’’ti. Parassa santike gahaṇena vinā attano sabhāveneva sayameva adhiṭṭhahitvā sīlasampannā. Bodhisattamātāpīti amhākaṃ bodhisattamātāpi. Kāladevilassāti yathā kāladevilassa santike aññadā gaṇhāti, bodhisatte pana…pe… sayameva sīlaṃ aggahesi, tathā vipassībodhisattamātāpīti adhippāyo.
21 “在人当中”这句话,是就一般人的习性来说的,意思是“所谓人间女子,对人间男子可能会生起想要男人的心”。可是菩萨的母亲,即使在天人之中,也根本不会生起那样的心。正如靠着菩萨的威力,菩萨的母亲不会生起想要男人的心;同样,正是靠着他的威力,她才不会被任何男人所征服,所以说“双脚走不动,就像被天锁绑住了一样”。巴利
21.‘‘Manussesū’’ti idaṃ pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘manussitthiyā nāma manussapurisesu purisādhippāyacittaṃ uppajjeyyā’’ti. Bodhisattassa mātuyā pana devesupi tādisaṃ cittaṃ nuppajjateva. Yathā bodhisattassa ānubhāvena bodhisattamātu purisādhippāyacittaṃ nuppajjati, evaṃ tassa ānubhāveneva sā kenaci purisena anabhibhavanīyāti āha ‘‘pādā na vahanti dibbasaṅkhalikā viya bajjhantī’’ti.
22 前面已经说过“与五种欲相应的心念不会生起”,后面却又说“具足、拥有五种欲而享受”。这两者怎么会不互相矛盾呢?为了说明这一点,所以接着说“先前……”等。“遮止事”,就是指遮止非梵行之事。因此说“依于对男子的意图”。“获得所缘”,就是指仅仅获得了色等五种欲的所缘。巴利
22. Pubbe ‘‘kāmaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ cittaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ, puna ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricāretī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Kathamidaṃ aññamaññaṃ na virujjhatīti āha ‘‘pubbe’’tiādi. Vatthupaṭikkhepoti abrahmacariyavatthupaṭisedho. Tenāha ‘‘purisādhippāyavasenā’’ti. Ārammaṇapaṭilābhoti rūpādipañcakāmaguṇārammaṇasseva paṭilābho.
23 “疲惫”是指倦怠。那时,她身体沉重、僵硬等状况根本不会出现。说“她看见在胎内的菩萨”,那么从什么时候开始能看见呢?回答说“越过羯罗蓝等阶段之后”等等。能看见本身就说明了它的作用。因为那时还不具备这种能力,所以在羯罗蓝等阶段看不见。与幼小、稚弱、仰卧的儿子一起。“那名为母亲者”等话,是依照通常的行为方式说的。因为转轮王的胎儿尚且得到特别的保护,而菩萨的胎儿由于功德资粮极为殊胜,更得到格外的保护,所以菩萨的母亲在饮食和举止上极为适宜,恭敬地保护胎儿。“为了安乐住”,是为了菩萨的安乐而住。“面向东方”,是面向母亲身体的前方。现在,为了说明在胎内者能被看见的内在和外在原因,说了“前生所造之业”等话。“她”,指那位天后。“处”,指腹部。就像水晶、云母片等通透一样,由于菩萨母亲腹部皮肤极薄的特性,光明通行无阻。正如菩萨的母亲能看见腹中的菩萨,菩萨是否也能同样看见母亲以及站在前方的其他色法呢?回答是不能,所以说“然而菩萨”。为什么虽然有眼、有光明却看不见呢?回答说“因为在腹内眼识不会生起”。就像呼吸一样,在那里眼识也不会生起,因为缺乏与之相应的作意。巴利
23.Kilamathoti khedo, kāyassa garubhāvakathinabhāvādayopi tassā tadā na honti eva. ‘‘Tirokucchigataṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kadā paṭṭhāya passatīti āha ‘‘kalalādikālaṃ atikkamitvā’’tiādi. Dassane payojanaṃ sayameva vadati. Tassa abhāvato kalalādikāle na passati. Puttena daharena mandena uttānaseyyakena saddhiṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ taṃ mātū’’tiādi pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ. Cakkavattigabbhatopi hi savisesaṃ bodhisattagabbho parihāraṃ labhati puññasambhārassa sātisayattā, tasmā bodhisattamātā ativiya sappāyāhārācārā ca hutvā sakkaccaṃ pariharati. Sukhavāsatthanti bodhisattassa sukhavāsatthaṃ. Puratthābhimukhoti mātu purimabhāgābhimukho. Idāni tirokucchigatassa dissamānatāya abbhantaraṃ, bāhirañca kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbe katakamma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Assāti deviyā. Vatthunti kucchiṃ. Phalikaabbhapaṭalādino viya bodhisattamātukucchitacassa patanubhāvena ālokassa vibandhābhāvato yathā bodhisattamātā kucchigataṃ bodhisattaṃ passati, kiṃ evaṃ bodhisattopi mātaraṃ, aññañca purato ṭhitaṃ rūpagataṃ passati, noti āha ‘‘bodhisatto panā’’tiādi. Kasmā pana sati cakkhumhi, āloke ca na passatīti āha ‘‘na hi antokucchiyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti. Assāsapassāsā viya hi tattha cakkhuviññāṇampi na uppajjati tajjassa samannāhārassa abhāvato.
24 就像别的女人因为生孩子,被那样的重病压垮,甚至死去;可是菩萨的母亲在菩萨住在胎里时,并没有出现要分娩的征兆,也没有任何疾病生起,她只是寿命尽了才去世。这个道理前面已经说过了。“因为是菩萨住过的地方”等等,是说明其中的原因。“他人不可受用”,是说别人不能受用,意思是不适合受用。如果真是那样,菩萨的父亲就该有另一位正后了;可是在菩萨的母亲还在世时,这并不合理,所以说“也不能”等等。“除去”,是从正后的位置上把她移开。为了说明“众生对自身欲贪的强烈,正是他们向外追寻感官对象的强大原因”,而说“众生对自身的欲贪很强”。“不能好好保护”,是说她不认真做正确的孕期保养。因此胎儿就有很多病痛。“处所变得清净”,是说子宫变得洁净。菩萨在母亲中年第三阶段入胎这件事,也包括在“观察她的寿命”里,因为这样能避免因年龄变化而出现的问题。而因女性生理特性可能产生的不适,则靠菩萨的威力而平息。巴利
24. Yathā aññā itthiyo vijātappaccayā tādisena rogena abhibhūtāpi hutvā maranti, bodhisattamātu pana bodhisatte kucchigate tassa vijāyananimittaṃ, na koci rogo uppajjati, kevalaṃ āyuparikkhayeneva kālaṃ karoti, svāyamattho heṭṭhā vutto eva. ‘‘Bodhisattena vasitaṭṭhānañhī’’tiādi tassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Aññesaṃ aparibhoganti aññehi na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na paribhogayogyanti attho. Tathā sati bodhisattapitu aññāya aggamahesiyā bhavitabbaṃ, tathāpi bodhisattamātari dharantiyā ayujjamānakanti āha ‘‘na ca sakkā’’tiādi. Apanetvāti aggamahesiṭhānato nīharitvā. Attani chandarāgavaseneva bahiddhā ārammaṇapariyesanāti visayinisārāgo sattānaṃ visayesu sārāgassa balavakāraṇanti dassento āha ‘‘sattānaṃ attabhāve chandarāgo balavā hotī’’ti. Anurakkhituṃ na sakkotīti sammā gabbhaparihāraṃ nānuyuñjati. Tena gabbho bahvābādho hoti. Vatthu visadaṃ hotīti gabbhāsayo visuddho hoti. Mātu majjhimavayassa tatiyakoṭṭhāse bodhisattagabbhokkamanampi tassā āyuparimāṇavilokaneneva saṅgahitaṃ vayovasena uppajjanakavikārassa parivajjanato. Itthisabhāvena uppajjanakavikāro pana bodhisattassa ānubhāveneva vūpasamati.
25 第七个月出生的人:从结生那一刻算起,在第七个月出生。他因为身体极其柔弱,受不了冷热。第八个月出生的人,在智慧和体格发育上固然胜过第七个月出生的人,但某些皮肤部位在发育过程中经不起摩擦,因此他活不下来。不过他们说:第七个月出生的人,那些部位还没有长出来。巴利
25.Sattamāsajātoti paṭisandhiggahaṇato sattame māse jāto. So sītuṇhakkhamo na hoti ativiya sukhumālatāya. Aṭṭhamāsajāto kāmaṃ sattamāsajātato buddhivayavā, ekacce pana cammapadesā vuddhiṃ pāpuṇantā ghaṭṭanaṃ na sahanti, tena so na jīvati. ‘‘Sattamāsajātassa pana na tāva te jātā’’ti vadanti.
27 净居天的梵天神众——那些诸漏已尽的梵天神——怀着“我们应当自己最先迎接这位世间庇护者、这位大丈夫”的恭敬与推崇之心,为了表达自己的喜悦,最先迎接了菩萨。所谓“化作接生妇的模样”,是指化现为照料产妇的助产士的样子。所谓“一派”,是指无畏山寺派的住众。就皮肤而言,是说像鱼眼一样洁净。菩萨的母亲站着,既不坐下,也不躺下。因此说“菩萨之母是站着生下菩萨的”。因为没有任何痛苦,她就这样站着顺利生产。其他女子则因为分娩的痛苦极为剧烈,忍受不了,所以要么坐着、要么躺着才能生产。巴利
27.Devāpaṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhantīti ‘‘lokanāthaṃ mahāpurisaṃ sayameva paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmā’’ti sañjātagāravabahumānā attano pītiṃ pavedentā khīṇāsavā suddhāvāsabrahmāno ādito paṭiggaṇhanti. Sūtivesanti sūtijagganadhātivesaṃ. Eketi abhayagirivāsino. Macchakkhisadisaṃ chavivasena. Aṭṭhāsi na nisīdi, na nipajji vā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva bodhisattaṃ bodhisattamātā vijāyatī’’ti. Niddukkhatāya ṭhitā eva hutvā vijāyati. Dukkhassa hi balavabhāvato taṃ dukkhaṃ asahamānā aññā itthiyo nisinnā vā nipannā vā vijāyanti.
28 用兽皮缝制而成的皮席,就是“阿吉那皮革席”。大威力,指具有广大的神通力量。大名闻,指随从众多,而且名声与赞誉广泛传播。巴利
28.Ajinappaveṇiyāti ajinacammehi sibbitvā katapaveṇiyā. Mahātejoti mahānubhāvo. Mahāyasoti mahāparivāro, vipulakittighoso ca.
29 支离破碎:因为从狭窄逼仄的地方出来,所以显得破碎,就像散裂开来一样,这就表明它们是不清净的。不黏着:在子宫里和产道中,不管哪里都不黏着、不附着,因此说“就像堤坝放水一样”。以水:指子宫里的水。不受沾染地出来:因为那个地方本来就没有会沾染的水、痰等东西。其实,从菩萨入胎那一刻起,由于他福德的力量,那个地方本来就是清净的,尤其像最上等的香室一样,散发着栴檀的香气。巴利
29.Bhaggavibhaggāti sambādhaṭṭhānato nikkhamanena vibhāvitattā bhaggā, vibhaggā viya ca hutvā, tena nesaṃ avisadabhāvameva dasseti. Alaggo hutvāti gabbhāsaye, yonipadese ca katthaci alaggo asatto hutvā, yato ‘‘dhamakaraṇato udakanikkhamanasadisa’’nti vuttaṃ. Udakenāti gabbhāsayagatena udakena. Amakkhitova nikkhamati sammakkhitassa tādisassa udakasemhādikasseva tattha abhāvato. Bodhisattassa hi puññānubhāvato paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya taṃ ṭhānaṃ pubbepi visuddhaṃ visesato paramasugandhagandhakuṭi viya candanagandhaṃ vāyantaṃ tiṭṭhati.
水团的意思,就是水团。巴利
Udakavaṭṭiyoti udakakkhandhā.
31 31.“刹那生”:在刹那间出生后,只存在短短一刹那。“被随顺引导时”:顺着有利的方向被引导时。“已经来到”:就是已经到达那个地方。“多分枝”:由宝石做成、有几百上千个支撑点的装饰。“千轮”:安置在那些装饰上面、有成千上万个圆环的装饰。“Marū”就是天人。但不应该这样看,因为菩萨在抬脚之前,就已经先观察过方向了。所以说“大士……”等等。“成为一片空地”:因为开阔通透,变得像寺院内院和周边空地一样,成为一片空地。“连一个同等的人也没有”:他们为了观看殊胜的菩萨而说:“在这里,连与你们同等的人都没有,何况更胜者?”“最上”:即首要的。那么,它凭什么成为首要的呢?他说“以功德”。这里“第一”一词是“首要”的同义词。然而,菩萨的首要性是不共于他人的,所以说“一切中最第一”,意思是“一切中最首要”。“Etasseva”:指此“最上”之词。在这里,有大威力的天神们确实那样说,那么其他的天神又怎么说呢?由于看见大士的威力等缘故。因为对于有大威力的天神们来说,大士的威力就像他们自己的威力一样,甚至与他们同等者的威力也成了现前可见的;而其他的天神听了他们的话,生起净信并推测,也那样说了。被宿世业已成熟、由法性所成就的法则所督促,在这个……当中……作了授记。巴利
31.Muhuttajātoti muhuttena jāto hutvā muhuttamattova. Anudhāriyamāneti anukūlavasena nīyamāne. Āgatānevāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatāni eva. Anekasākhanti ratanamayānekasatapatiṭṭhānahīrakaṃ. Sahassamaṇḍalanti tesaṃ upariṭṭhitaṃ anekasahassamaṇḍalahīrakaṃ. Marūti devā. Na kho panaevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ padavītihārato pageva disāvilokanassa katattā. Tenāha ‘‘mahāsatto hī’’tiādi. Ekaṅgaṇānīti vivaṭabhāvena vihāraṅgaṇapariveṇaṅgaṇāni viya ekaṅgaṇasadisāni ahesuṃ. Sadisopi natthīti tumhākaṃ idaṃ vilokanaṃ visiṭṭhe passituṃ ‘‘idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Aggoti padhāno, kena panassa padhānatāti āha ‘‘guṇehī’’ti. Paṭhama-saddo cettha padhānapariyāyo. Bodhisattassa pana padhānatā anaññasādhāraṇāti āha ‘‘sabbapaṭhamo’’ti, sabbapadhānoti attho. Etassevāti aggasaddasseva. Ettha ca mahesakkhā tāva devā tathā ca vadanti, itare pana kathanti? Mahāsattassa ānubhāvadassanādinā. Mahesakkhānañhi devānaṃ mahāsattassa ānubhāvo viya tena sadisānampi ānubhāvo paccakkho ahosīti, itare pana tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā saddahantā anuminantā tathā āhaṃsu. Paripākagatapubbahetusaṃsiddhāya dhammatāya codiyamāno imasmiṃ…pe… byākāsi.
菩萨刚出生时的站立等相,是哪些殊胜证得的前行相?为了确定并显示这些,说了“在此……”等话。其中,站立是获得四神足的前行相,因为依神足之力,能在出世间法中成功建立。面朝北方,是度越世间而行走的前行相。因此,世尊征服了包括天神在内的世间,没有被任何人征服。所以说“这是压倒大众、征服大众而行走的前行相”。同样,走七步,是具足七觉支、行于圣道的前行相。持极清净白伞,是持极清净解脱伞的前行相。五种王者的物品聚合,是五种解脱功德聚合的前行相。无遮障地观察四方,是无遮障智的前行相。以“我乃最上”等语作无所畏惧的言说,是不被任何人阻碍、不停止而转妙法轮的前行相。宣称“此为最后生”,是未来不再有生的前行相,应知无取……乃至……是前行相,因为对于那那未来当得的殊胜,那那相是不违逆的。此经中未曾说,他处所载的次第也未提及。所谓“引”,即依彼彼经及义注中所载之方式引来显示。巴利
Jātamattasseva bodhisattassa ṭhānādīni yesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhūtānīti te niddhāretvā dassento ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha patiṭṭhānaṃ caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ iddhipādavasena lokuttaradhammesu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasamijjhanato. Uttarābhimukhabhāvo lokassa uttaraṇavasena gamanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tena hi bhagavā sadevakassa lokassa abhibhūto, kenaci anabhibhūto ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘mahājanaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā gamanassa pubbanimitta’’nti. Tathā sattapadagamanaṃ sattapadabojjhaṅgasampannaariyamaggagamanassa. Suvisuddhasetacchattadhāraṇaṃ suvisuddhavimuttichattadhāraṇassa. Pañcarājakakudhabhaṇḍasamāyogo pañcavidhavimuttiguṇasamāyogassa. Anāvaṭadisānuvilokanaṃ anāvaṭañāṇatāya. ‘‘Aggohamasmī’’tiādinā achambhitavācābhāsanaṃ kenaci avibandhanīyatāya appavattiyassa saddhammacakkappavattanassa. ‘‘Ayamantimā jātī’’ti āyatiṃ jātiyā abhāvakittanā anupādi…pe… pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ tassa tassa anāgate laddhabbavisesassa taṃ taṃ nimittaṃ abyabhicārīti katvā. Na āgatoti imasmiṃ sutte, aññattha ca vakkhamānāya anupubbiyā na āgato. Āharitvāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte, aṭṭhakathāsu ca āgatanayena āharitvā dīpetabbo.
“十千世界震动”这句话,虽然在这里的巴利原文中已经出现,但为了指出接下来要说的种种神变的根本,所以又说了;其他类似的情况也应当这样理解。像弦绷的琵琶、皮绷的鼓,这只是五支组合乐器的举例;或者通过“ca”这个词,也应当理解为包含了其余乐器。他们说:“脚镣等物在那一刹那断裂后,又恢复成原来的样子;同样,天生盲人等的眼根、耳根等,以那样的业为缘,在那一刹那就生起,随即又消失。”“断裂”是指在脚上绑缚的地方断开了。“消失”是指止息了。“空中宝珠”是指各处宫殿中的宝珠等。“以自光照耀”是指以自己极其明亮的光辉照耀。风没有吹起,就是说没有聚集起来的风。没有粗风刮起,而是柔软舒适、能给众生带来快乐的风吹着。他们趴伏在地上,无法在高处站立。“时节调适”是指具足不冷不热的气候。“拍手”是指手臂相击的声音,从意义上说,是把左手放在胸口,用右掌拍打而发出声音。用口发出欢呼,就是发出欢呼的声音。成为单一幢幡串,就是连续不断的幢幡串聚在一起。不只是这些,还有其他的,比如“降下种种花、种种香花的雨,太阳还看得见时星星就闪耀,清澈明净的水从地下涌出,穴居的畜生从住处出来,贪嗔痴也变得微薄,地上的尘土止息,不好的气味消失,天香飘来,有色的天神以本来形貌出现在人们眼前,众生没有死亡和投生”等等——这些在广大誓愿时出现的三十二种前兆,那时全都无一例外地出现了。巴利
‘‘Dasasahassilokadhātukampī’’ti idaṃ satipi idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatatte vakkhamānānaṃ acchariyānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ aññampi evarūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tantibaddhā vīṇā cammabaddhā bheriyoti pañcaṅgikatūriyassa nidassanamattaṃ, ca-saddena vā itaresampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Andubandhanādīni taṅkhaṇe eva chajjitvā puna pākatikāneva honti, tathā jaccandhādīnaṃ cakkhusotādīni tathārūpakammapaccayā tasmiṃyeva khaṇe uppajjitvā tāvadeva vigacchantī’’ti vadanti. Chijjiṃsūti ca pādesu bandhaṭṭhānesu chijjiṃsu. Vigacchiṃsūti vūpasamiṃsu. Ākāsaṭṭhakaratanāni nāma taṃtaṃvimānagatamaṇiratanādīni. Sakatejobhāsitānīti ativiya samujjalāya attano pabhāya obhāsitāni ahesuṃ. Nappavattīti na sannipāto. Na vāyīti kharo vāto na vāyi. Mudusukho pana sattānaṃ sukhāvaho vāyi. Pathavigatā ahesuṃ uccaṭṭhāne ṭhātuṃ avisahantā. Utusampannoti anuṇhāsītatāsaṅkhātena utunā sampanno. Apphoṭanaṃ vuccati bhujahatthasaṅghaṭṭanasaddo, atthato pana vāmahatthaṃ ure ṭhapetvā dakkhiṇena puthupāṇinā hatthatāḷanena saddakaraṇaṃ. Mukhena usseḷanaṃ saddassa muñcanaṃ seḷanaṃ. Ekaddhajamālā ahosi nirantaraṃ dhajamālāsamodhānagatāya. Na kevalañca etāni eva, atha kho aññānipi ‘‘vicittapupphasugandhapupphavassadevopavassi sūriye dissamāne eva tārakā obhāsiṃsu, acchaṃ vippasannaṃ udakaṃ pathavito ubbhijji, bilāsayā ca tiracchānā āsayato nikkhamiṃsu, rāgadosamohāpi tanu bhaviṃsu, pathaviyaṃ rajo vūpasami, aniṭṭhagandho vigacchi, dibbagandho vāyi, rūpino devā sarūpeneva manussānaṃ āpāthaṃ agamaṃsu, sattānaṃ cutūpapātā nāhesu’’nti evamādīni yāni mahābhinīhārasamaye uppannāni dvattiṃsapubbanimittāni, tāni anavasesato tadā ahesunti.
在这里也一样,应当知道在这些地震等现象中同样有前行相。意思是不只是在初生者站立等的时候才有。证得一切知智的前行相,因为它动摇了一切所知以及外道师之见。没有人教诫而自己就在这一小世界中集会,是没有人教诫而一时聚集起来领受法教的前行相。诸天神先领受是获得天住的前行相,人间后领受是获得不动住的前行相,因为那住处具有稳固的性质。琵琶自己发声,是不靠他人教导、自己就获得次第住的前行相。鼓自己响起,是能宣告到轮围边际的大众的法鼓、不死鼓声的前行相。脚镣等断裂是破除慢结缚的前行相。大众的病愈,就是断除一切轮转苦病、证得谛理的前行相。“大众”这个词,应当与“大众获得天眼、大众获得天耳界”等各处关联起来。由于以神足修习而成就殊胜智行的成就,所以说“跛足者的速行成就是四神足证得的前行相”。善达其处是四无碍解证得的前行相,因为能够随顺义等而通达义等。宝石的自光照耀,即将显示世间的法光,所以这成为自光照耀的前行相。巴利
Tatrāpīti tesupi pathavikampādīsu evaṃ pubbanimittabhāvo veditabbo. Na kevalaṃ sampatijātassa ṭhānādīsu evāti adhippāyo. Sabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ sabbassa ñeyyassa, titthakaramatassa ca cālanato. Kenaci anussāhitānaṃyeva imasmiṃyeva ekacakkavāḷe sannipāto kenaci anussāhitānaṃyeva ekappahārenevasannipatitvā dhammapaṭiggaṇhanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ devatānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ dibbavihārapaṭilābhassa, pacchā manussānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ tattheva ṭhānassa niccalasabhāvato āneñjavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Vīṇānaṃ sayaṃ vajjanaṃ parūpadesena vinā sayameva anupubbavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Bherīnaṃ vajjanaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantāya parisāya pavedanasamatthassa dhammabheriyā anusāvanassa amatadundubhighosanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Andubandhanādīnaṃ chedo mānavinibandhabhedanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Mahājanassa rogavigamo tasseva sakalavaṭṭadukkharogavigamabhūtassa saccapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. ‘‘Mahājanassā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘mahājanassa dibbacakkhupaṭilābhassa, mahājanassa dibbasotadhātupaṭilābhassā’’tiādinā tattha tattha ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Iddhipādabhāvanāvasena sātisayañāṇajavasampattisiddhīti āha ‘‘pīṭhasappīnaṃ javasampadā caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimitta’’nti. Supaṭṭanasampāpuṇanaṃ catupaṭisambhidādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ. Atthādianurūpaṃ atthādīsu sampaṭipattibhāvato. Ratanānaṃ sakatejobhāsitattaṃ yaṃ lokassa dhammobhāsaṃ dassessati, tena tassa sakatejobhāsitattassa pubbanimittaṃ.
证得四梵住的前兆,是因为它彻底平息了一切怨敌。十一种火熄灭的前兆,是因为涅槃具有能熄灭难以熄灭之火的性质。见智光的前兆,是因为在无光之处能见到光明。以涅槃之味来说,就是以烦恼寂灭之味。所谓一味,是指教法在一切处都同为一味,而且让本来毫无甜味的世间变得完全甘甜。摧破六十二种恶见的前兆,是因为彻底去除了恶见之风的缘故。舍弃虚空等无依、不平、动摇之处,就像鸟儿行于地面一样,这是众生舍弃这类邪执之后,以身命皈依三宝的前兆。如月为大众所喜爱,就是像月亮那样为大众所喜爱。太阳远离寒热而带来时节的舒适,是获得远离热恼的身心之乐的前兆。诸天神以拍手等游戏,是借由走向轮回的尽头、觉悟法性,而以感兴之语显示欢喜的前兆。法雨骤降,是以说法之智的迅疾降下不死法雨的前兆。以身至念所得的禅那为基础,生起道果之乐的体验,就是证得身至念不死甘露;而由于它也能给身体带来无疲厌之乐,所以说没有饥渴逼恼是它的前兆。在注疏中,则分别就饥饿和口渴来说。这些前兆的区分,应当以特殊与共通的分类,以及牛与牛犊的道理来理解。“自然”一词也应与“开启八支圣道之门”联系起来理解。圆满状态,就是充满的状态。有人说“以圣幢幡蔓为装饰”是指以袈裟幢幡蔓为装饰,但实际上是指包括天神的世间以圣道和觉支的幢幡蔓而庄严的前兆。至于这里没有提到的,则很容易理解。巴利
Catubrahmavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ tassa sabbaso veravūpasamanato. Ekādasaagginibbāpanassa pubbanimittaṃ dunnibbāpananibbānabhāvato. Ñāṇālokādassanassa pubbanimittaṃ anāloke ālokadassanabhāvato. Nibbānarasenāti kilesānaṃ nibbāyanarasena. Ekarasabhāvassāti sāsanassa sabbattha ekarasabhāvassa, tañca kho amadhurassa lokassa sabbaso madhurabhāvāpādanena. Dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatabhindanassa pubbanimittaṃ sabbaso diṭṭhigatavātāpanayanavasena. Ākāsādiappatiṭṭhavisamacañcalaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya sakuṇānaṃ pathavigamanaṃ tādisaṃ micchāgāhaṃ pahāya sattānaṃ pāṇehi ratanattayasaraṇagamanassa pubbanittaṃ. Bahujanakantatāyāti candassa viya bahujanassa kantatāya. Sūriyassa uṇhasītavivajjitautusukhatā pariḷāhavivajjitakāyikacetasikasukhappattiyā pubbanimittaṃ.Devatānaṃ apphoṭanādīhi kīḷanaṃ pamoduppatti bhavantagamanena, dhammasabhāvabodhanena ca udānavasena pamodavibhāvanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Dhammavegavassanassāti desanāñāṇavegena dhammāmatassa vassanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Kāyagatāsativasena laddhaṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppāditamaggaphalasukhānubhavo kāyagatāsatiamatapaṭilābho, tassa pana kāyassāpi atappakasukhāvahattā khudāpipāsāpīḷanābhāvo pubbanimittaṃ vutto . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana khudaṃ, pipāsañca bhinditvā vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbanimittānaṃ bhedo visesasāmaññavibhāgena, gobalībaddañāyena ca gahetabbo. ‘‘Sayamevā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgikamaggadvāravivaraṇassā’’ti etthāpi ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Bharitabhāvassāti paripuṇṇabhāvassa. ‘‘Ariyaddhajamālāmālitāyāti kāsāyaddhajamālāvantatāyā’’ti keci, sadevakassa lokassa pana ariyamaggabojjhaṅgaddhajamālāhi mālibhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Yaṃ panettha anuddhaṭaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
这里说的“初生”等话出现的这一段,前面已经解答过了,所以我们在这里没有新的内容要说,这就是本意。那时,菩萨虽然在地上走,但在大众看来就像在虚空中行走一样。这里以决定论的方式说,此即是决定、法决定,是诸菩萨的法性。以宿作论的方式说,是因为过去生中造作、积集了那样的福业,所以在大众看来如此。以主宰化作论的方式说,在这些众生之上有主宰之性,各自的业就叫作主宰,它的化作即是产生自己的果。大士也是由能征服含天神世间的广大福业所生,因此是由那主宰所化作,而这就是殊胜的化作,即大神力,由此他向大众如是显现。这样种种说了之后,何必用这种迂回的说法呢?最终直接回答。初生时怎么能以足行于地?如此有大神力,仿佛行于虚空一般,这是基于推想的方式,犹如行于虚空。由于快速行过七步,虽然可见形体,但在大众看来宛如不可见。裸形、幼小的身体与那样的威仪不相称,因此应知由于业力所生的神变,他如同庄严整备者,如同十六岁青年般显现在大众面前。这只是以菩萨的福德威力,在当时这样显现而已。后来他只是幼童,并非如此。因为如实开示了合乎佛陀身份的菩萨威力,大众由他的回答,如同由佛陀……心生欢喜。巴利
Etthāti ‘‘sampatijāto’’tiādinā āgate imasmiṃ vāre. Vissajjitova, tasmā amhehi idha apubbaṃ vattabbaṃ natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā pathaviyaṃ gacchantopi mahāsatto ākāsena gacchanto viya mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti ayamettha niyati dhammaniyāmo bodhisattānaṃ dhammatā ti idaṃ niyativādavasena kathanaṃ. Pubbe purimajātīsu tādisassa puññasambhārakammassa katattā upacitattā mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti idaṃ pubbekatakammavādavasena kathanaṃ. Imesaṃ sattānaṃ upari īsanasīlatāya yathāsakaṃ kammameva issaro nāma, tassa nimmānaṃ attano phalassa nibbattanaṃ mahāpurisopi sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthena uḷārena puññakammena nibbattito, tena issarena nimmito nāma, tassa cāyaṃ nimmānaviseso, yadidaṃ mahānubhāvatā, yāya mahājanassa tathā upaṭṭhāsīti idaṃ issaranimmānavasena kathanaṃ. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ bahulaṃ vatvā kiṃ imāya pariyāyakathāyāti avasāne ujukameva byākari. Sampatijāto pathaviyaṃ kathaṃ padasā gacchati, evaṃ mahānubhāvo ākāsena maññe gacchatīti parikappanavasena ākāsena gacchanto viya ahosi. Sīghataraṃ pana sattapadavītihārena gatattā dissamānarūpopi mahājanassa adissamāno viya ahosi. Acelakabhāvo, khuddakasarīratā ca tādisassa iriyāpathassa na anucchavikāti kammānubhāvasañjanitapāṭihāriyavasena alaṅkatapaṭiyatto viya, soḷasavassuddesiko viya ca mahājanassa upaṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsattassa puññānubhāvena tadā tathā upaṭṭhānamattamevetanti. Pacchā bāladārakova ahosi, na tādisoti. Buddhabhāvānucchavikassa bodhisattānubhāvassa yāthāvato paveditattā parisā cassa byākaraṇena buddhena viya…pe… attamanā ahosi.
“一切法性”:应当知道,前面所说的全部十六种法性,是一切菩萨都具备的。从福德与智慧资粮的展现可以看出,这些菩萨彼此是同等的。巴利
Sabbadhammatāti sabbā soḷasavidhāpi yathāvuttā dhammatā sabbabodhisattānaṃ hontīti veditabbā puññañāṇasambhāradassanena nesaṃ ekasadisattā.
三十二大人相注释巴利
Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
33 细滑布团:指适合少年躺卧的、折叠好的细软滑布。刹帝利、婆罗门等,是出身种姓。孔丹尼亚、乔达摩等,是族姓。波尼迦、吉迦利迦、释迦族、拘利等,是家族地域。用等字,涵盖了容貌、自在、眷属等一切圆满成就。大的:意思是广大的、殊胜的。成满:就是成就。应去之道:这里说趣这个词是以业为所行。因为依再生,由善行和恶行所应去往的,就是趣,即再生有的差别。随自己的意愿而流转的,叫趣,也就是内心的倾向。皈依处:指归宿、依怙处。因为对离一切有为之阿拉汉来说,涅槃就是他的皈依处。我对你说那些。巴利
33.Dukūlacumbaṭaketi daharassa nipajjanayogyatāvasena paṭisaṃhaṭadukūlasukhume. ‘‘Khattiyo brāhmaṇo’’ti evamādi jāti. ‘‘Koṇḍañño gotamo’’ti evamādi gottaṃ. ‘‘Poṇikā cikkhallikā sākiyā koḷiyā’’ti evamādi kulapadeso. Ādi-saddena rūpissariyaparivārādisabbasampattiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Mahantassāti vipulassa, uḷārassāti attho. Nipphattiyoti siddhiyo. Gantabbagatiyāti gati-saddassa kammasādhanatamāha. Upapajjanavasena hi sucaritaduccaritehi gantabbāti gatiyo, upapattibhavaviseso. Gacchati yathāruci pavattatīti gati, ajjhāsayo. Paṭisaraṇeti parāyaṇe avassaye. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyuttassa hi arahato nibbānameva taṃpaṭisaraṇaṃ. Tyāhanti te ahaṃ.
他奉行十种善法,以及无可指责的王法(详见《本生经·大肉本生》的详细解说),所以是如法的。他以此法让整个世间欢喜,所以叫法王。因为转轮王是依如法、依正道获得王位,而不是以非法获得,所以说“因为依如法获得王位,所以是法王”。四方都以大海为尽头,所以叫“四边”,那里各个岛屿上都有大地,因此说“东方……乃至……自在者”。“征服者”是指征服了该征服的——征服了内在的贪欲、嗔怒等,也征服了外在的敌王、敌军,并且保持已征服的状态。严格来说,转轮王并没有什么战争,但因为已经成就了需要通过战争才能得到的胜利,所以说“已征服战场”。“达到地方稳固者”:这位国王具足四种稀有法等,地方上的人们对他生起了坚定、不可被任何人动摇的爱戴;或者,地方上的人们因为他如法而行,获得了稳定、牢固,所以叫“达到地方稳固者”。把刀架在人们胸口,用夺取想要的财物等方式施加暴行的,就是暴虐者。巴利
Dasavidhe kusaladhamme, agarahite ca rājadhamme (jā. 2 mahāmaṃsajātake vitthāro) niyuttoti dhammiko. Tena ca dhammena sakalaṃ lokaṃ rañjetīti dhammarājā. Yasmā cakkavattī dhammena ñāyena rajjaṃ adhigacchati, na adhammena, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammena laddharajjattā dhammarājā’’ti. Catūsu disāsu samuddapariyosānatāya caturantā nāma tattha tattha dīpe mahāpathavīti āha ‘‘puratthima…pe… issaro’’ti. Vijitāvīti vijetabbassa vijitavā, kāmakodhādikassa abbhantarassa, paṭirājabhūtassa bāhirassa ca arigaṇassa vijayi, vijetvā ṭhitoti attho. Kāmaṃ cakkavattino kenaci yuddhaṃ nāma natthi, yuddhena pana sādhetabbassa vijayassa siddhiyā ‘‘vijitasaṅgāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Janapadova catubbidhaacchariyadhammādisamannāgate asmiṃ rājini thāvariyaṃ kenaci asaṃhāriyaṃ daḷhaṃ bhattabhāvaṃ patto, janapade vā attano dhammikāya paṭipattiyā thāvariyaṃ thirabhāvaṃ pattoti janapadatthāvariyappatto. Manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitadhanaharaṇādinā parasāhasakāritāya sāhasikā.
从“能令人生起喜悦”这个意义上说,就是通过产生不过度的喜与悦。再从词义上讲,因为它使人欢喜,所以叫“宝”。人们心里会想“啊,真是迷人”,因此它被心所珍重。他们说,“这种心中的珍重,是因为它值得供养”,所以“被心所珍重”就是“值得供养”的意思。它价值巨大、广大、没有限量,所以叫“大价值”。没有任何秤或比喻能衡量它,所以叫“无可比”,也就是无与伦比。它只是偶尔才出现,很难得到,所以叫“难见”。只有具足无量与殊胜功德的众生才能享用,所以叫“非下劣众生所受用”。现在,为了说明这些“被心所珍重”等含义在轮宝中特别具足,并以此类推到其余诸宝,于是开始说“轮宝……”等。对国王来说,它并不是像别处那样普通的依止处,因为它是获得不共权威等成就的原因,也是众生如愿获得利益的原因。它没有可衡量的价值,因为它由极其殊胜、光耀的七宝所成,并且具有稀有、奇妙的大威神力。它有多大价值,就有多无可比。当众生厌离罪恶、远离黑暗、勤修福德而变得清净,这样的时代才适合佛陀出现。同样,转轮王也只有在这样的时代才可能出现,所以说“又因为……”。这是用比喻来说的,而比喻与被比喻的事物并不完全一样。因此,诸佛只是偶尔、很久才出现,转轮王则不是这样;即便如此,由于圆满转轮王的德行也很困难,所以他们同样难以出现。应当知道,这里是以“难以出现”这一点相同,来说他们“难以见到”。虽然由轮宝的威力所成就的功德,是转轮王及其眷属所共有的,但仍然可以说“只有转轮王才以主人身份、以支配力来享用它”,为了说明它正是为此意义而出现,所以说“那这个……”等。由于所说的五种或六种意义在其余诸宝中也能得到,所以说“其余诸宝也是如此”。他具足象宝、马宝、将军宝,是因为它们能带来不被征服的胜利;具足轮宝,是因为它作为眷属;具足其余诸宝,是因为它们作为享用和资具。象宝、马宝、摩尼宝、女宝是作为享用和资具,其余诸宝则是作为眷属,应当这样搭配理解。巴利
Ratijananaṭṭhenāti atappakapītisomanassuppādanena. Saddatthato pana rametīti ratanaṃ. ‘‘Aho manohara’’nti citte kattabbatāya cittīkataṃ. ‘‘Svāyaṃ cittīkāro tassa pūjanīyatāyā’’ti cittīkatanti pūjanīyanti atthaṃ vadanti. Mahantaṃ vipulaṃ aparimitaṃ mūlaṃ agghatīti mahagghaṃ. Natthi etassa tulā upamāti atulaṃ, asadisaṃ. Kadāci eva uppajjanato dukkhena laddhabbattā dullabhadassanaṃ. Anomehi uḷāraguṇeheva sattehi paribhuñjitabbato anomasattaparibhogaṃ. Idāni nesaṃ cittīkatādiatthānaṃ savisesaṃ cakkaratane labbhamānataṃ dassetvā itaresupi te atidisituṃ ‘‘cakkaratanassa cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti rañño anaññasādhāraṇissariyādisampattipaṭilābhahetuto, sattānañca yathicchitatthapaṭilābhahetuto. Aggho natthi ativiya uḷārasamujjalasattaratanamayattā, acchariyabbhutamahānubhāvatāya ca. Yadaggena mahagghaṃ, tadaggena atulaṃ. Sattānaṃ pāpajigucchanena vigatakāḷako puññapasutatāya maṇḍabhūto yādiso kālo buddhuppādāraho, tādise eva cakkavattīnampi sambhavoti āha ‘‘yasmā ca panā’’tiādi. Upamāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, upamopameyyānañca na accantameva sadisatā. Tasmā yathā buddhā kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, na tathā cakkavattino, evaṃ santepi cakkavattivattaparipūraṇassāpi dukkarabhāvatopi dullabhuppādāyevāti , iminā dullabhuppādatāsāmaññena tesaṃ dullabhadassanatā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ cakkaratanānubhāvena sijjhamāno guṇo cakkavattiparivārasādhāraṇo, tathāpi ‘‘cakkavattī eva naṃ sāmibhāvena visavitāya paribhuñjatī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati tadatthaṃ uppajjanatoti dassento ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādimāha. Yathāvuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ, channampi vā atthānaṃ itararatanesupi labbhanato ‘‘evaṃ sesānipī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthiassa-pariṇāyakaratanehi ajitavijayato, cakkaratanena ca parivārabhāvena, sesehi paribhogūpakaraṇabhāvena samannāgato. Hatthiassamaṇiitthiratanehi paribhogūpakaraṇabhāvena sesehi parivārabhāvenāti yojanā.
四大洲的荣华富贵,就是指在那里得到的荣华成就和受用成就。所谓“同样如此”,就是像前面“仅在午前”等所说的那种威力。以遍及一由旬的范围,而有一由旬的黑暗。它远离了过长等六种过失。巴利
Catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ sirivibhavanti tattha laddhaṃ sirisampattiñceva bhogasampattiñca. Tādisamevāti ‘‘purebhattamevā’’tiādinā vuttānubhāvameva. Yojanappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ byāpanena yojanappamāṇaṃ andhakāraṃ. Atidīghatādichabbidhadosaparivajjitaṃ.
“勇者”是指有力量的人,“无畏者”是指无所畏惧,所以解释说“不胆怯”。“支”是指原因。凭借这个原因,他们可以被称为“英雄”,这个原因就是英雄的支分。因此说“这是精进的名称”。因为轮宝一直转动到轮围山,所以说“以轮围山为界,安立在大海为边际之处”。“不用刑罚”这一句,已经说明了不施加罚金和身体上的刑罚;“不用刀兵”这一句,则是说明不以军队作战。为了表明这两方面,所以说了“对于那些犯了罪的人……”等。所说的那种情形,就是以大海为边际。巴利
Sūrāti sattivanto, nibbhayāti atthoti āha ‘‘abhīrukā’’ti. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ. Yena kāraṇena ‘‘vīrā’’ti vucceyyuṃ, taṃ vīraṅgaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vīriyassetaṃnāma’’nti. Yāva cakkavāḷapabbatā cakkassa vattanato ‘‘cakkavāḷapabbataṃ sīmaṃ katvā ṭhitasamuddapariyanta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Adaṇḍenā’’ti imināva dhanadaṇḍassa, sarīradaṇḍassa ca akaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Asatthenā’’ti iminā pana senāya yujjhanassāti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye katāparādhe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttappakāranti sāgarapariyantaṃ.
从“染着”的意义上说是贪,从“渴爱”的意义上说是渴爱,这是按烦恼显现方式的差别,把贪本身分成两种来说的。同样地,这两种贪都完全具有覆盖的作用。正如经中所说:“当人被贪欲控制时,那时就是一片黑暗”,还有“被渴爱所覆盖”。按照这个道理,嗔等其他烦恼的覆盖作用也应该这样说明。由于提到了“烦恼”,也就把疑等其余烦恼都包括在内了。因为所有这些不善法生起时,都会覆盖、缠缚众生的心相续,阻碍善法的生起,所以它们被称为“覆盖者”“覆盖”。而“揭开了覆盖”这个词,是把 o 音改成 ā 音来表述的。巴利
‘‘Rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā’’ti pavattiākārabhedena lobho eva dvidhā vutto . Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanaṭṭho ekantiko. Yathāha ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti, (netti. 11, 27) ‘‘taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 64) ca. Iminā nayena dosādīnampi chadanaṭṭho vattabbo. Kilesaggahaṇena vicikicchādayo sesakilesā vuttā. Yasmā te sabbe pāpadhammā uppajjamānā sattasantānaṃ chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhanti kusalappavattiṃ nivārenti, tasmā te ‘‘chadanā, chadā’’ti ca vuttā. Vivaṭṭacchadāti ca o-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā niddeso.
35 “那些”是指两种成就。“成为表征”是指成为让人得以了解的根据。因为凭借这些能识别出大人之相,所以称为“相”。在站立、行走等时,双脚稳稳地、平正地立在地上,这个人就具有“善安立之脚”。为了通过反面的方式说明他的善安立之脚性,才说了“如同……”等话。其中,“前脚掌”指脚掌的前部;“脚后跟”指脚跟;“边”指脚掌两侧各一边,或者指两边合起来的边缘侧面。“而此人的……”等话,是从正面随顺地阐明其含义。就像金鞋底一样平整地放下,放下时整个脚掌同时触地;同样,提起时整个脚掌也同时离开地面。因此,这个人就被称为“善安立之脚”。至于这里应当说的足底平整等所引生的稀有奇异的果报,将在后面《相经释》中说明。巴利
35.Tāsanti dvinnampi nipphattīnaṃ. Nimittabhūtānīti ñāpakakāraṇabhūtāni. Tathā hi lakkhīyati mahāpurisabhāvo etehīti lakkhaṇāni. Ṭhānagamanādīsu bhūmiyaṃ suṭṭhu samaṃ patiṭṭhitā pādā etassāti suppatiṭṭhitapādo. Taṃ panassa suppatiṭṭhitapādataṃ byatirekamukhena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aggatalanti aggapādatalaṃ. Paṇhīti paṇhitalaṃ. Passanti pādatalassa dvīsu passesu ekekaṃ, ubhayameva vā pariyantaṃ passaṃ. ‘‘Assa panā’’tiādi anvayato atthavibhāvanaṃ. Suvaṇṇapādukatalamiva ujukaṃ nikkhipiyamānaṃ. Ekappahārenevāti ekakkhaṇeyeva. Sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmiṃ phusati nikkhipane. Ekappahāreneva sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmito uṭṭhahatīti yojanā. Tasmā ayaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādoti nigamanaṃ. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ anupubbaninnādiacchariyabbhutaṃ nissandaphalaṃ, taṃ parato lakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.201) āvibhavissatīti.
“脐可见”:轮相的中心呈圆形,非常清晰分明,可以被看到、被认出来,这就是这句话的意思。“被脐所划分”:是指被那个中心划分,以划分的方式存在。“朝向脐的围护板”:普通车轮为了防止车轴被撞击,需要在朝向车脐的位置安放一块围护板,这里指的就是那块覆盖物。“轮辋上的摩尼刻线”:指在轮辋上以行列形式排列的摩尼纹刻线。“多种的”:指对种种细节纹样的解说。“矛”:指兵器中的矛。“吉祥纹”:指吉祥的图案。“欢喜纹”:右旋的图案。“吉祥符纹”:指吉祥符的标志。“耳环纹”:耳饰,即编束成环状的头发。“增长纹”:前方等处如灯焰状的图案。“孔雀尾拂纹”:孔雀羽毛团,或者是以孔雀羽毛覆盖的扇子一类。“牦牛尾拂”:指牦牛尾做的拂尘。“悉达多等满瓶满盘”:指以悉达多等装满的瓶和盘。说了“轮围山”之后,为了显示它的主要组成部分,所以说“雪山、须弥山……乃至千……”。所谓“依转轮王眷属”,这是为了显示象宝等也包括在其中的道理。应当知道,如上面所说的象宝等种种细节,都是属于轮相本身的庄严眷属。巴利
Nābhi dissatīti lakkhaṇacakkassa nābhi parimaṇḍalasaṇṭhānā suparibyattā hutvā dissati, labbhatīti adhippāyo. Nābhiparicchinnāti tassaṃ nābhiyaṃ paricchinnā paricchedavasena ṭhitā. Nābhimukhaparikkhepapaṭṭoti pakaticakkassa akkhabbhāhatapariharaṇatthaṃ nābhimukhe ṭhapetabbaṃ parikkhepapaṭṭo, tappaṭicchanno idha adhippeto. Nemimaṇikāti nemiyaṃ āvalibhāvena ṭhitamaṇikālekhā. Sambahulavāroti bahuvidhalekhaṅgavibhāvanavāro. Sattīti āvudhasatti. Sirivacchoti siriaṅgā. Nandīti dakkhiṇāvattaṃ. Sovattikoti sovattiaṅgo. Vaṭaṃsakoti āveḷaṃ. Vaḍḍhamānakanti purimahādīsu dīpaṅkaṃ. Morahatthakoti morapiñchakalāpo, morapiñchapaṭisibbito vā bījanīviseso. Vāḷabījanīti cāmarivālaṃ. Siddhatthādi puṇṇaghaṭapuṇṇapātiyo. ‘‘Cakkavāḷo’’ti vatvā tassa padhānāvayave dassetuṃ ‘‘himavā sineru…pe… sahassānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkavattirañño parisaṃ upādāyā’’ti idaṃ hatthiratanādīnampi tattha labbhamānabhāvadassanaṃ. Sabbotisattiādiko yathāvutto aṅgaviseso cakkalakkhaṇasseva parivāroti veditabbo.
“广长的足跟”这句话,是相对于别人的足跟比较长来说的,并不是说太长了,所以说“圆满的足跟”。为了通过反面的例子说明足跟相怎样才算圆满,就说了“正如……”等话。“以尖端”:指用圆形的顶部。“卷拢”:指为了让它非常圆整而卷拢。“如同红色的毛毬”:指像红色羊毛做成的球。巴利
‘‘Āyatapaṇhī’’ti idaṃ aññesaṃ paṇhito dīghataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pana atidīghatanti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇapaṇhī’’ti. Yathā pana paṇhilakkhaṇaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āraggenāti maṇḍalāya sikhāya. Vaṭṭetvāti yathā suvaṭṭaṃ hoti, evaṃ vaṭṭetvā. Rattakambalageṇḍukasadisāti rattakambalamayageṇḍukasadisā.
“像猴子的一样”,这是就长度和平整来说的。“树脂油”,是指混有榕树胶等树脂的油,也有人把它叫做“香树脂”。这里提到树脂油,是为了显示绿黄色薄层那种浓稠润滑的样子。巴利
‘‘Makkaṭassevā’’ti dīghabhāvaṃ, samatañca sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Niyyāsatelenāti chattiritaniyyāsādiniyyāsasammissena telena, yaṃ ‘‘surabhiniyyāsa’’ntipi vadanti. Niyyāsatelaggahaṇañcettha haritālavaṭṭiyā ghanasiniddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ.
就像一块被反复弹打上百次的棉絮片,浸到融化的酥油里之后会变得极其柔软;为了说明大人的手脚也是这样,才说了“在融化的酥油里”等话。“嫩”就是指细嫩柔软。巴利
Yathā satakkhattuṃ vihataṃ kappāsapaṭalaṃ sappimaṇḍe osāritaṃ ativiya mudu hoti, evaṃ mahāpurisassa hatthapādāti dassento ‘‘sappimaṇḍe’’tiādimāha. Talunāti sukhumālā.
以皮:指包裹在指缝间的皮。指缝相连:并不是指缝只从一侧连在一起。等量:从长度来说,彼此一样长。麦纹:位于手指内侧关节上的麦粒状纹路。穿透:因为各指节的位置互相对应,所以即使把手指伸开,手指也像互相穿透一样,彼此接触而停住。巴利
Cammenāti aṅgulantaraveṭhitacammena. Paṭibaddhaaṅgulantaroti ekato sambaddhaaṅgulantaro na hoti. Ekappamāṇāti dīghato samānappamāṇā. Yavalakkhaṇanti abbhantarato aṅgulipabbe ṭhitaṃ yavalakkhaṇaṃ. Paṭivijjhitvāti taṃtaṃpabbānaṃ samānadesatāya aṅgulīnaṃ pasāritakālepi aññamaññaṃ vijjhitāni viya phusitvā tiṭṭhanti.
踝骨叫做“螺”。踝骨以上的部分叫“高踝”,也就是脚。“在脚背”,指在脚背附近。“以彼”是说,因为踝骨处在脚背的位置而被系缚,这就是句子的连接方式。这个“以彼”也要连到后面两句上:“因为这样被系缚,就不能随意转动;因为不能随意转动,行走时连脚底也看不见。”“上方”指从脚背往上大约两指的高度,也有人说大约四指。这些部位是隐藏的,不像别人那样明显可见。“以彼”是指踝骨安立在上方的状态。“他的”指这位大人的。为了说明即使其他地方有动摇,这里仍然稳固,所以提及脐。“只有下半身动摇”这句是前面那句的原因说明:因为只有下半身动摇,所以从脐……是稳固的。“以乐脚转动”这句则是前面和后面两句的原因说明:因为以乐脚转动,所以只有下半身动摇;因为以乐脚转动,所以向前……只有向后。巴利
Saṅkhā vuccanti gopphakā, uddhaṃ saṅkhā etesanti ussaṅkhā, pādā. Piṭṭhipādeti piṭṭhipādasamīpe. Tenāti piṭṭhipāde ṭhitagopphakabhāvena baddhā hontīti yojanā. Tayidaṃ ‘‘tenā’’ti padaṃ uparipadadvayepi yojetabbaṃ ‘‘tena baddhabhāvena na yathāsukhaṃ parivaṭṭanti, tena yathāsukhaṃ naparivaṭṭanena gacchantānaṃ pādatalānipi na dissantī’’ti. Uparīti piṭṭhipādato dvitiaṅgulimattaṃ uddhaṃ, ‘‘caturaṅgulamatta’’nti ca vadanti. Nigūḷhāni ca honti, na aññesaṃ viya paññāyamānāni. Tenāti gopphakānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitabhāvena. Assāti mahāpurisassa. Satipi desantarappavattiyaṃ niccaloti dassanatthaṃ nābhiggahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Adhokāyova iñjatī’’ti idaṃ purimapadassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā adhokāyova iñjati, tasmā nābhito…pe… niccalo hoti. ‘‘Sukhena pādā parivaṭṭantī’’ti idaṃ pana purimassa, pacchimassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā sukhena pādā parivaṭṭanti, tasmā adhokāyova iñjati, yasmā sukhena pādā parivaṭṭanti, tasmā puratopi…pe… pacchatoyevāti.
因为羚羊的腿四周肌肉均匀,越往上越粗壮,大人也是这样,所以经中说“胫如羚羊”。“圆胫”是指四周肌肉丰满、圆润的腿。因此说“非仅单侧”等。巴利
Yasmā eṇimigassa samantato ekasadisamaṃsā anukkamena uddhaṃ thūlā jaṅghā honti, tathā mahāpurisassāpi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘eṇimigasadisajaṅgho’’ti. Paripuṇṇajaṅghoti samantato maṃsūpacayena paripuṇṇajaṅgho. Tenāha ‘‘na ekato’’tiādi.
“以此”是说:通过“不弯曲”等话语,借由说明膝盖柔软的状态来表达其含义。“其余众生”是指不具备这一特征的人。他们要么是驼背,因为下半身比上半身短;要么是侏儒,因为上半身比下半身短。由此表明,除了正自觉者和转轮王之外,其他众生都归入驼背一类或侏儒一类。巴利
Etenāti ‘‘anonamanto’’tiādivacanena, jāṇuphāsubhāvadīpanenāti attho. Avasesajanāti iminā lakkhaṇena rahitajanā. Khujjā vā honti heṭṭhimakāyato uparimakāyassa rassatāya, vāmanā vā uparimakāyato heṭṭhimakāyassa rassatāya, etena ṭhapetvā sammāsambuddhaṃ, cakkavattinañca itare sattā khujjapakkhikā, vāmanapakkhikā cāti dasseti.
当然,所有莲花的花蕊都是金色的,不过金莲花的花蕊因为本身光洁明亮,所以比前者更胜一筹,因此说“似金莲花蕊的”。“安放的”是指收摄在内、含纳其中。而它处于那样的状态时,就被那者所覆盖,因此说“被覆盖的”。巴利
Kāmaṃ sabbāpi padumakaṇṇikā suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva, kañcanapadumakaṇṇikā pana pabhassarabhāvena tato sātisayāti āha ‘‘suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇikasadisehī’’ti. Ohitanti samohitaṃ antogadhaṃ. Tathābhūtaṃ pana taṃ tena channaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘paṭicchanna’’nti.
“金色”就是金色之色,这是这里的含义,所以经文说“以生朱砂”等等,这个含义也应当通过语义重复的方式来理解。这里“色”这个词指的是身体。说了第一种解释之后,考虑到并没有那样约定俗成的用法,于是只取“色”字为颜色之义,也就是把“色”当作颜色的同义词,从而说出第二种解释。因此,通过这两个词,说的就是“犹如极纯净的黄金那样的肤色”。巴利
Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇavaṇṇoti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘jātihiṅgulakenā’’tiādi, svāyamattho āvuttiñāyena ca veditabbo. Sarīrapariyāyo idha vaṇṇa-saddoti adhippāyo. Paṭhamavikappaṃ vatvā tathārūpāya pana ruḷhiyā abhāvaṃ manasi katvā vaṇṇadhātupariyāyameva vaṇṇa-saddaṃ gahetvā dutiyavikappo vutto. Tasmā padadvayenāpi suniddhantasuvaṇṇasadisachavivaṇṇoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“尘”是指细微的灰尘。“垢”是指能带来污秽状态的灰尘积聚。因此说“或垢”。如果它会自行脱落,那怎么还需要沐浴等呢?所以说“洗手等”。巴利
Rajoti sukhumarajo. Jallanti malīnabhāvāvaho reṇusañcayo. Tenāha ‘‘malaṃ vā’’ti. Yadi vivattati, kathaṃ nhānādīnīti āha ‘‘hatthadhovanādīnī’’tiādi.
在右旋发旋的末端,也就是按右旋方式转动的发旋的末端。巴利
Āvaṭṭapariyosāneti padakkhiṇāvaṭṭanavasena pavattassa āvaṭṭassa ante.
梵天神的身体不论在前还是在后都不弯曲,笔直向上伸展,所以说“像梵天神一样身姿笔直”。不过这种身姿笔直,要在身体各部分发育成熟时才能看出来,不是在年幼的时候,因此说“将会是挺拔修长的身体”。关于“另外两处”,是指“肩膀和膝盖”这两个地方,向后弯曲者向前弯曲,这样连接起来理解。“侧弯”是指从右侧或左侧弯曲。“像柱子一样”,是指像安放在画像工具上的柱脚一样。巴利
Brahmuno sarīraṃ purato vā pacchato vā anonamitvā ujukameva uggatanti āha ‘‘brahmā viya ujugatto’’ti. Sā panāyaṃ ujugattatā avayavesu buddhippattesu daṭṭhabbā, na daharakāleti vuttaṃ ‘‘uggatadīghasarīro bhavissatī’’ti. Itaresūti ‘‘khandhajāṇūsū’’ti imesu dvīsu ṭhānesu namantā purato namantīti ānetvā sambandho. Passavaṅkāti dakkhiṇapassena vā vāmapassena vā vaṅkā. Sūlasadisāti potthakarūpakaraṇe ṭhapitasūlapādasadisā.
“七处隆满”是指手背等七个身体部位隆起、肌肉充实,所以叫“七处隆满”。应当理解为骨端隐伏。由于已经说了“隐伏的脉网”这一相文,因此也就等于说了“骨端隐伏”。这里“手背等”中的“等”字已经包含了肩峰和肩头,为了展示其中的一部分,才说“转起……以肩”。同样,通过“如石像”等说法,肩峰隐伏这一点也已经说明清楚了。巴利
Hatthapiṭṭhiādivasena satta sarīrāvayavā ussadā upacitamaṃsā etassāti sattussado. Aṭṭhikoṭiyo paññāyantīti yojanā. Nigūḷhasirājālehīti lakkhaṇavacanametanti tena nigūḷhaaṭṭhikoṭīhītipi vuttameva hotīti. Hatthapiṭṭhādīhīti ettha ādi-saddena aṃsakūṭakhandhakūṭānaṃ saṅgahe siddhe taṃ ekadesena dassento ‘‘vaṭṭetvā…pe… khandhenā’’ti āha. ‘‘Silārūpakaṃ viyā’’tiādinā vā nigūḷhaaṃsakūṭatāpi vibhāvitā yevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
狮子的前半身,就是“狮子前半身”。因为身体各部分都圆满具足,整个身躯就像狮子的前半身一样,所以叫“狮子前半身者”。因此经中说:“就像狮子的前半身,整个身体都圆满。”“似狮子”就是像狮子一样。“不成为恶立、异立”是指:既不是恶劣的安立,也不是畸形的安立;也就是说,各个肢节不会因为不相称或畸形而安立。“安立”就是站立的姿态。以“长者”,指手指、鼻子等;以“短者”,指脖子等;以“粗者”,指大腿、手臂等;以“细者”,指头发、汗毛、腰等;以“广者”,指眼睛、手掌等;以“圆者”,指小腿、手等。巴利
Sīhassa pubbaddhaṃ sīhapubbaddhaṃ, paripuṇṇāvayavatāya sīhapubbaddhaṃ viya sakalo kāyo assāti sīhapubbaddhakāyo. Tenāha ‘‘sīhassa pubbaddhakāyo viya sabbo kāyo paripuṇṇo’’ti. Sīhassevāti sīhassa viya. Dussaṇṭhitavisaṇṭhito na hotīti duṭṭhu saṇṭhito, virūpasaṇṭhito ca na hoti, tesaṃ tesaṃ avayavānaṃ ayuttabhāvena, virūpabhāvena ca saṇṭhiti upagato na hotīti attho. Saṇṭhantīti saṇṭhahanti. Dīghehīti aṅgulināsādīhi. Rassehīti gīvādīhi. Thūlehīti ūrubāhuādīhi . Kisehīti kesalomamajjhādīhi. Puthulehīti akkhihatthatalādīhi. Vaṭṭehīti jaṅghahatthādīhi.
因为具备百福之相,所以由种种心、由福德心所庄严,而成就了这样的心之状态:只有这样的心之状态,才适合成为诸佛法身的依止基础。它是由十巴拉密所准备、所造作而成的。另有一种文本写作“以布施心、以福德心”,意思是依布施、持戒等而转起的福德心。巴利
Satapuññalakkhaṇatāya nānācittena puññacittena cittito sañjātacittabhāvo ‘‘īdiso eva buddhānaṃ dhammakāyassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhavituṃ yutto’’ti dasapāramīhi sajjito abhisaṅkhato, ‘‘dānacittena puññacittenā’’ti vā pāṭho, dānavasena, sīlādivasena ca pavattapuññacittenāti attho.
两肩之间,是指两臂背侧之间的部位,也就是后背中央的上方。积聚圆满,是指没有凹陷地积聚起来,因为与两肩齐平而圆满。隆起,是指高起来,也就是没有凹陷而平坦的意思。因此说如金板。巴利
Dvinnaṃ koṭṭānaṃ antaranti dvinnaṃ piṭṭhibāhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ piṭṭhimajjhassa uparibhāgo. Citaṃ paripuṇṇanti aninnabhāvena citaṃ, dvīhi koṭṭehi samatalatāya paripuṇṇaṃ. Uggammāti uggantvā, aninnaṃ samatalaṃ hutvāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘suvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viyā’’ti.
像榕树那样周圆,意思是像周圆的榕树那样周圆。本来应该说成“榕树般周圆之周圆”,但省略了一个“周圆”一词,所以说成“榕树般周圆”。因此经文说“枝干等齐的榕树”等等。并不是所有的榕树都是周圆的,但因为“周圆”这个词就在旁边,所取的正是周圆的那种榕树。所以,即使不省略那个“周圆”词,这个意思也能得到,因此说“如榕树般周圆”。至于“其……为量”,是把o音替换成了va音。巴利
Nigrodho viya parimaṇḍaloti parimaṇḍalanigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo, ‘‘nigrodhaparimaṇḍalaparimaṇḍalo’’ti vattabbe ekassa parimaṇḍala-saddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo’’ti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘samakkhandhasākho nigrodho’’tiādi. Na hi sabbo nigrodho parimaṇḍaloti, parimaṇḍalasaddasannidhānena vā parimaṇḍalova nigrodho gayhatīti ekassa parimaṇḍalasaddassa lopena vināpi ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘nigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo’’ti. Yāvatako assāti yāvatakvassa o-kārassa va-kārādesaṃ katvā.
双肩匀称圆满,就是两肩平整而圆满。应当这样连贯理解:像鹤一样长颈,像鹭一样弯颈,像猪一样粗颈。像金铃一样,就是像黄金做的小鼓。巴利
Samavaṭṭitakkhandhoti samaṃ suvaṭṭitakkhandho. Koñcā viya dīghagalā, bakā viya vaṅkagalā , varāhā viya puthulagalāti yojanā. Suvaṇṇāḷiṅgasadisoti suvaṇṇamayakhuddakamudiṅgasadiso.
所谓“味端最上者”,是指把甘甜等各种味道吞进去、送到身体里面,这些能尝味道的器官中最殊胜的,就叫味端最上。他具有这些,所以是味端最上者。正因为如此,由于精气不能遍满、界分低劣,所以他们多有疾病。巴利
Rasaggasaggīti madhurādibhedaṃ rasaṃ gasanti anto pavesantīti rasaggasā rasaggasānaṃ aggā rasaggasaggā, tā etassa santīti rasaggasaggī. Tenāti ojāya apharaṇena hīnadhātukattā te bahvābādhā honti.
“颊”是支撑牙齿那个部位的名称。世尊的颊就像狮子的颊,所以世尊称为“狮子颊”。在这里,因为对佛陀的色身和法身来说,一切譬喻都只是低劣的譬喻,没有同等的譬喻,更不用说更高的譬喻了,所以为了说明这也只是低劣的譬喻,才说了“于此”等话。因为大丈夫的下牙和上牙都是按照下牙的样式安立的,所以说“两者都圆满”。但这并不是完全的圆,而是只圆了四分之三,所以说“像半月第十二日的月亮”。“善察”:就是依据自己的相论去观察。牙齿的高低也要从内侧和外侧两方面来理解,不只是看尖端。因此说“像用铁片切开的螺膜”。“铁片”指的是锯子。意思是它们会平齐,不会高低不平,是齐平的形状。巴利
Hanūti sannissayadantādhārassa samaññā, taṃ bhagavato sīhassa hanu viya, tasmā bhagavā sīhahanu. Tattha yasmā buddhānaṃ rūpakāyassa, dhammakāyassa ca upamā nāma hīnūpamāva, natthi samānūpamā, kuto adhikūpamā, tasmā ayampi hīnūpamāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā mahāpurisassa heṭṭhimānurūpavaseneva uparimampi saṇṭhitaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dvepi paripuṇṇānī’’ti, tañca kho na sabbaso parimaṇḍalatāya, atha kho tibhāgāvasesamaṇḍalatāyāti āha ‘‘dvādasiyā pakkhassa candasadisānī’’ti. Sallakkhetvāti attano lakkhaṇasatthānusārena upadhāretvā. Dantānaṃ uccanīcatā abbhantarabāhirapassavasenapi veditabbā, na aggavaseneva. Tenāha ‘‘ayapaṭṭakena chinnasaṅkhapaṭalaṃ viyā’’ti. Ayapaṭṭakanti kakacaṃ adhippetaṃ. Samā bhavissanti, na visamā, samasaṇṭhānāti attho.
具有极其柔软、长、宽等种类功德而成就生起,所以叫 pabhūtā;再把 bha 音转成 ha 音,就成为 pahūtā,他的舌头是 pahūtā,所以叫 pahūtajivho。巴利
Sātisayaṃ mududīghaputhulatādippakāraguṇā hutvā bhūtā jātāti pabhūtā, bha-kārassa ha-kāraṃ katvā pahūtā jivhā etassāti pahūtajivho.
因为声音的相续被一再切断,所以是“断音”。因为呈现多种样态,所以是“破音”。因为像乌鸦的声音那样不悦耳,所以是“鸦音”。所谓“无滞碍”,是指没有扰乱的事物;而所谓“事物”,应当理解为字母生起的处所。“具八支”中的“支”,后面会说明。“妙音”,就是甜美的声音。巴利
Vicchinditvā vicchinditvā pavattasaratāya chinnassarāpi. Anekākāratāya bhinnassarāpi. Kākassa viya amanuññasaratāya kākassarāpi. Apalibuddhattāti anupaddutavatthukattā, vatthūti ca akkharuppattiṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatoti ettha aṅgāni parato āgamissanti. Mañjughosoti madhurassaro.
深蓝眼,是指眼睛特别蓝。这里说的“特别”,应当理解为蓝色格外鲜明突出,而不是说眼球的蓝色本身变得更多,所以经文才说“不是整个眼睛都是蓝色”等等。黄、红等颜色,是就位于白色圆轮中的条纹来说的。至于蓝、白、黑等颜色,则应当就各自所在的圆轮来理解。巴利
Abhinīlanettoti adhikanīlanetto, adhikatā ca sātisayaṃ nīlabhāvena veditabbā, na nettanīlabhāvasseva adhikabhāvatoti āha ‘‘na sakalanīlanetto’’tiādi. Pītalohitavaṇṇā setamaṇḍalagatarājivasena. Nīlasetakāḷavaṇṇā pana taṃtaṃmaṇḍalavaseneva veditabbā.
有人说,“眼具”就是眼皮;另一些人说,是眼皮的边缘轮廓。不过,应该把它连同眼皮一起理解为眼珠。因为这样一来,前面所说的“深幽光耀”也才说得通。通过“所意许的”这个词,这里表明其意趣是依据“以部分指代整体”的方式。由于“睫毛”一词在世间通常用来指眼皮上的细毛,所以就说“柔软、细滑、蓝色、纤细的睫毛密布的眼睛”。巴利
‘‘Cakkhubhaṇḍanti akkhidala’’nti keci. ‘‘Akkhidalavaṭuma’’nti aññe. Akkhidalehi pana saddhiṃ akkhibimbanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi viniggatagambhīrajotanāpi yuttā hoti. ‘‘Adhippeta’’nti iminā ayamettha adhippāyo ekadesena samudāyupalakkhaṇañāyenāti dasseti. Yasmā pakhuma-saddo loke akkhidalalomesu niruḷho, tenevāha ‘‘mudusiniddhanīlasukhumapakhumācitāni akkhīnī’’ti.
虽然“白毫”这个词在世间一般是泛指毛发,但在这里是指一种特殊的毛,所以说“白毫即毛”。“生于眉间”,就是长在额头正中。这是以它的洁白来打比方,不是以柔软来打比方,因为白毫比那还要柔软得多。所以才说“犹如澄清酥油的凝块”等。“银泡”,指的是银质的星星。巴利
Kiñcāpi uṇṇā-saddo loke avisesato lomapariyāyo, idha pana lomavisesavācakoti āha ‘‘uṇṇā loma’’nti. Nalāṭavemajjhejātāti nalāṭamajjhagatā jātā. Odātatāya upamā, na mudutāya . Uṇṇā hi tatopi sātisayaṃ mudutarā. Tenāha‘‘sappi maṇḍe’’tiādi. Rajatapubbuḷakanti rajatamayatārakamāha.
佛陀和转轮王因为前额圆满、头形圆满,所以被称为“顶髻头”。这句话是依据这两种含义说的。现在为了说明这两种含义,接着在“大人的前额善安立”等处说了“大人确实……”等话。因为极其细滑、金色、光辉、圆满,所以像国王缠头的顶髻布条一样闪耀。就像用顶髻布条缠绕的头部部位,就像巧匠所造的顶髻圆环。“猴头”是指头分成两半。“果头”是指像果实一样的头。“骨露头”是指因为没有肉而骨头极度突出,或者因为瘦弱而只剩皮包骨的头。“葫芦头”是指像葫芦一样的头。“凸额头”是指后脑勺隆突下垂的头。“依前一种方式”是指就前额圆满的方面而言。“像缠着顶髻布条的头”是指像用顶髻布条缠绕的头部部位。“像顶髻”是指像巧匠所造的顶髻圆环。巴利
Dve atthavase paṭicca vuttanti yasmā buddhā, cakkavattino ca paripuṇṇanalāṭatāya, paripuṇṇasīsabimbatāya ca ‘‘uṇhīsasīsā’’ti vuccanti, tasmā te dve atthavase paṭicca ‘‘uṇhīsasīso’’ti idaṃ vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ atthadvayaṃ mahāpurise suppatiṭṭhitanti ‘‘mahāpurisassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṇhatamatāya, suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya, pabhassaratāya, paripuṇṇatāya ca rañño bandhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Kapisīsāti dvidhābhūtasīsā. Phalasīsāti phalitasīsā. Aṭṭhisīsāti maṃsassa abhāvato ativiya aṭṭhitāya, patanubhāvato vā taconaddhaaṭṭhimattasīsā. Tumbasīsāti lābusadisasīsā. Pabbhārasīsāti piṭṭhibhāgena olambamānasīsā. Purimanayenāti paripuṇṇanalāṭatāpakkhena. Uṇhīsaveṭhitasīso viyāti uṇhīsapaṭṭena veṭhitasīsapadeso viya. Uṇhīsaṃ viyāti chekena sippinā viracitauṇhīsamaṇḍalaṃ viya.
维巴斯等共同名称的注释巴利
Vipassīsamaññāvaṇṇanā
37 所谓“广说”,就是在把握相的特征时,让看相师们感到满意的详细解说。入胎时作为征兆的梦,领受者感到满意这件事,前面已经说过了。“无过失”是指没有碱土、盐碱之类的过失。“保姆”是指喂奶的保姆,因为她们安排哺乳、喂以乳汁,所以叫保姆。“如是”这个词是用来承接“六十”这个词的。其余的,就是洗浴的、怀抱的、侍奉的这三种。她们也因为安排沐浴、使人沐浴以及怀抱等,所以也被称为“保姆”。其中,怀抱是指用胸、腿或手长时间地抱持。侍奉是指从别人的怀里接到自己怀里,从别人的手臂转到自己的手臂,递相传送。巴利
37.Tassa vitthāroti tassa lakkhaṇapariggaṇhane nemittakānaṃ santappanassa vitthāro vitthārakathā. Gabbhokkantiyaṃ nimittabhūta supinapaṭiggāhakasantappane vuttoyeva. Niddosenāti khārikaloṇikādidosarahitena. Dhātiyoti thaññapāyikā dhātiyo. Tā hi dhāpenti thaññaṃ pāyentīti dhātiyo.‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘saṭṭhi’’nti padaṃ upasaṃharati , sesāpīti nhāpikā, dhārikā, parihārikāti imā tividhā. Tāpi dahanti vidahanti nhānaṃ dahanti dhārentīti ‘‘dhātiyo’’ tveva vuccanti. Tattha dhāraṇaṃ urasā, ūrunā, hatthehi vā suciraṃ velaṃ sandhāraṇaṃ. Pariharaṇaṃ aññassa aṅkato attano aṅkaṃ, aññassa bāhuto attano bāhuṃ upasaṃharantehi haraṇaṃ sampāpanaṃ.
38 妙音,是指柔和的声音。凡是柔和的,就不粗糙,所以说“不粗之声”。和美音,是指令人愉悦的声音;而它之所以令人愉悦,是因为善巧且与福德相应,所以说“善巧精妙之声”。甘甜音,是指听起来舒服的声音;而它之所以听起来舒服,是因为极其可爱,所以说“可爱之声”。可爱音,是指让人喜爱之声;而它之所以让人喜爱,是因为能让听者对自己生起虔敬,所以说“能生喜爱之声”。迦陵频伽鸟音:迦陵频伽鸟的声音进入哪些众生的耳中,那些众生就会因这声音的圆满美妙而忘失自己的本性,完全被这声音掌控、牵引。为了说明它是这样甘甜,所以说“在此”等话。其中,“迦陵频伽鸟”等,是在说明它的本性。“嬉戏”,是指由喜悦冲动所引发的游戏。“舍弃”,是指心想“连咀嚼也会妨碍听到甘甜的声音”,于是把草叶扔掉。“不放下”,是指不放在地上,而让它停在虚空中。被猛兽追逐的鹿等,因此放下对死亡的恐惧。“展开翅膀”,是指让翅膀自在地展开,不飞走而停在那里。巴利
38.Mañjussaroti saṇhassaro. Yo hi saṇho, so kharo na hotīti āha ‘‘akharassaro’’ti. Vaggussaroti manorammassaro, manorammatā cassa cāturiyane puññayogatoti āha ‘‘chekanipuṇassaro’’ti. Madhurassaroti sotasukhassaro, sotasukhatā cassa ativiya iṭṭhabhāvenāti āha ‘‘sātassaro’’ti. Pemanīyassaroti piyāyitabbassaro, piyāyitabbatā cassa suṇantānaṃ attani bhattisamuppādanenāti āha ‘‘pemajanakassaro’’ti. Karavīkassaroti. Karavīkasaddo yesaṃ sattānaṃ sotapathaṃ upagacchati, te attano sarasampattiyā pakatiṃ jahāpetvā avase karonto attano vase vatteti, evaṃ madhuroti dassento ‘‘tatrida’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘karavīkasakuṇe’’tiādi tassa sabhāvakathanaṃ. Laḷitanti pītivegasamuṭṭhitaṃ līḷaṃ. Chaḍḍetvāti ‘‘saṅkharaṇampi madhurasaddasavanantarāyakara’’nti tiṇāni apanetvā. Anikkhipitvāti bhūmiyaṃ anikkhipitvā ākāsagatameva katvā. Anubaddhamigā vāḷamigehi. Tato maraṇabhayaṃ hitvā. Pakkhe pasāretvāti pakkhe yathāpasārite katvā apatantā tiṭṭhanti.
他放出金笼,是因为金笼在一由旬范围的空中,随他自己的命令而运行。因此说“那位国王命令”等。“嬉戏”就是开始嬉戏。“那喜”是指以佛陀功德为所缘的喜,以同样的方式反复生起、不曾舍离的喜;那些长老已伏断烦恼,在长老们跟前获得了听闻佛法的助缘,由于亲依止成就圆满、智慧成熟,以七……而安住。因为是与七百位宫人一同步行前往长老们所在之处,所以说“与七百位步行者在一起”。从那里,从迦陵频伽鸟的声音……。以百倍……应当知道,这是因为从无量百千俱胝劫所积集的福德资粮所生起的事物成就。巴利
Suvaṇṇapañjaraṃ vissajjesi yojanappamāṇe ākāse attano āṇāya pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘so rājāṇāyā’’tiādi. Laḷiṃsūti laḷitaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Taṃ pītinti taṃ buddhaguṇārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ teneva nīhārena punappunaṃ pavattaṃ pītiṃ avijahitvā vikkhambhitakilesā therānaṃ santike laddhadhammassavanasappāyā upanissayasampattiyā paripakkañāṇatāya sattahi…pe… patiṭṭhāsi. Sattasatamattena orodhajanena saddhiṃ padasāva therānaṃ santikaṃ upagatattā ‘‘sattahi jaṅghasatehi saddhi’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatoti karavīkasaddato. Satabhāgena…pe… veditabbo anekakappakoṭisatasambhūtapuññasambhārasamudāgatavatthusampattibhāvato.
39 业果所生:这是由特别殊胜的善业所产生,不被胆汁、痰、血等所障蔽,能够领纳远处所缘,与业果俱生,或者由业的果报而生的净眼。天眼有两种:业所成和修习所成。这里说的是业所成,所以说“非修习所成”。修习所成的天眼,将在菩提树下生起。这里“他”的了别虽然是由意识进行的,但因为眼识对那相已经那样辨明了,意识就在那里那样转起,所以说“依彼相……能作”。巴利
39.Kammavipākajanti sātisayasucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ dūrepi ārammaṇaṃ sampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ kammavipākena sahajātaṃ, kammassa vā vipākabhāvena jātaṃ pasādacakkhu. Duvidhañhi dibbacakkhuṃ kammamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti. Tatridaṃ kammamayanti āha ‘‘na bhāvanāmaya’’nti. Bhāvanāmayaṃ pana bodhimūle uppajjissati. Ayaṃ ‘‘so’’ti sallakkhaṇaṃ kāmaṃ manoviññāṇena hoti, cakkhuviññāṇena pana tassa tathā vibhāvitattā manoviññāṇassa tattha tathāpavattīti āha ‘‘yena nimittaṃ…pe… sakkotī’’ti.
40 词义就是声音的含义。所谓“闭眼”,是指闭着眼睛看,这并不清净;同样地,眼睛没有睁开时,闭眼所见的状态也不清净。反过来,睁着眼睛看则是清净的,所以说“时而”等等。巴利
40.Vacanatthoti saddattho. Nimīlananti nimīlanadassanaṃ navisuddhaṃ, tathā ca akkhīni avivaṭāni nimīladassanassa na visuddhibhāvato. Tabbipariyāyato pana dassanaṃ visuddhaṃ, vivaṭañcāti āha ‘‘antarantarā’’tiādi.
41 41. 关于“nī”:取它“了知”的词根义,所以说“引导即了知”。正如“无相者不可被引导”以及“智者应引导人中最胜者”这些说法。而取“nī”这个词根“使转起”的含义,则是“引导即使之转起”。他在种种应做之事中都不放逸。巴利
41. Nī-iti – jānanatthaṃ dhātuṃ gahetvā āha ‘‘panayati jānātī’’ti. Yato vuttaṃ ‘‘animittā na nāyare’’ti (visuddhi. 1.174; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.20), ‘‘vidūbhi neyyaṃ naravarassā’’ti (netti. saṅgahavāra) ca. Nī-iti pana pavattanatthaṃ dhātuṃ gahetvā ‘‘nayati pavattetī’’ti. Appamatto ahosi tesu tesu kiccakaraṇīyesu.
42 42. “雨居”是省略了后半部分而成为“雨”;因此,适合在雨季或于雨季中舒适共住,所以叫“雨居”,指那座宫殿。而月份因为处在雨季这个时节里,所以叫“雨季的”。至于其余的,“冬季的”“夏季的”也是这样。这里也是用省略后半部分的方式来作说明。巴利
42. Vassāvāso vassaṃ uttarapadalopena, tasmā vassaṃ, vasse vā, sannivāsaphāsutāya arahatīti vassiko, pāsādo. Māsā pana vasse utumhi bhavāti vassikā. Itaresūti hemantikaṃ gimhikanti imesu. Eseva nayoti uttarapadalopena niddesaṃ atidisati.
它既不太高,也不太低:不像夏季那样高,也不像冬季那样低,而是因为具有两者中间的相状,所以既不太高,也不太低。所谓“它的”,是指这座宫殿的。“不太多”:不像夏季宫殿的那样太多。“不太少”:不像冬季宫殿的那样又小、窗网又稀疏。“混合的”:不像冬季宫殿那样只有暖房,也不像夏季宫殿那样只有凉房,而是两者兼具。“单薄”:不粗厚。“为了热气进入”:为了让太阳的热气透进来。“南侧墙壁上的壁龛”:指南面墙壁上的壁龛。“柔滑”:是有光泽的意思;单说“柔滑”,其实也已经表达了厚重、高档的意思。“辛辣所附”:指与三辛等辛辣药材相关。“出水装置”:指能流出水流的装置。就像有喷水装置一样,那里也造了出雪的装置。因此应当知道,如同冬季一般,会有雪花飘落下来。巴利
Nātiucco hoti nātinīcoti gimhiko viya ucco, hemantiko viya nīco na hoti, atha kho tadubhayavemajjhalakkhaṇatāya nātiucco hoti, nātinīco. Assāti pāsādassa. Nātibahūnīti gimhikassa viya na atibahūni. Nātitanūnīti hemantikassa viya na khuddakāni, tanutarajālāni ca. Missakānevāti hemantike viya na uṇhaniyāneva, gimhike viya ca na sītaniyāneva, atha kho ubhayamissakāneva. Tanukānīti na puthulāni. Uṇhappavesanatthāyāti sūriyasantāpānuppavesāya. Bhittiniyūhānīti dakkhiṇapasse bhittīsu niyūhāni. Siniddhanti sinehavantaṃ, siniddhaggahaṇeneva cassa garukatāpi vuttā eva. Kaṭukasannissitanti tikaṭukādikaṭukadrabbūpasañhitaṃ. Udakayantānīti udakadhārāvissandayantāni. Yathā jalayantāni, evaṃ himayantānipi tattha karonti eva. Tasmā hemante viya himāni patantāniyeva hontīti ca veditabbaṃ.
一切场所,也包括所有整理、沐浴、进食、游戏、散步等地方,并不只是居住的地方。因此经文说“守门人等”。其中说明理由:“据说国王”等等。巴利
Sabbaṭṭhānānipīti sabbāni paṭikiriyānhānabhojanakīḷāsañcaraṇādiṭṭhānānipi, na nivāsaṭṭhānāniyeva. Tenāha ‘‘dovārikāpī’’tiādi. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘rājā kirā’’tiādi.
老人相注释巴利
Jiṇṇapurisavaṇṇanā
44 像弯曲的椽子一样,是指弯曲的椽子。因为为了说明弯曲者的弯曲状态,连不弯曲的椽子也被拿来(作对比)。身体弯曲,是指身体从一开始就隆起来、弯弯曲曲的样子。因此经文说“肩”等等。杖为依止,是说他的行走以持杖为要务,所以叫杖为依止;或者说,杖是他向前行走的原因,所以叫杖为依止。杖为行,是说在站立等动作中,杖是他的依靠,没有杖就不能活动;或者说,他靠杖行走,杖是他行走的原因,所以叫杖为行。杖为皈依也是同样的道理。衰老所困,是指被衰老折磨、耗尽。当车在前方时,在到达岔路时,在前行的军众中,菩萨坐上车,行于中间;当它在前方时,那辆车驶向另一个方向。军众在后,那时所有军众都在后面。在那样的情况下,在所说的那种道路地段上。那个人,是指那个衰老的人。净居天,是指那些在悉达多等三位正自觉者的教法中修习梵行,往生到净居天成为梵天神者。他们那时站在那里。他显示:当被你这么问“这个所谓衰老是什么”时,从意义上说是什么,请你确定后告诉我。因为其自身相未确定,菩萨用阳性代词说“什么”。因为“如什么生起”这二者,在世间大多生起的或是女人或是男人,即便如此,也用阳性代词来说它,应当如此理解。“说了什么”等,正是为了阐明其自身相未确定。巴利
44.Gopānasivaṅkanti vaṅkagopānasī viya. Vaṅkānañhi vaṅkabhāvassa nidassanatthaṃ avaṅkagopānasīpi gayhati. Ābhoggavaṅkanti ādito paṭṭhāya abbhuggatāya kuṭilasarīratāya vaṅkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khandhe’’tiādi. Daṇḍaparaṃ daṇḍaggahaṇaparaṃ ayanaṃ gamanaṃ etassāti daṇḍaparāyanaṃ, daṇḍo vā paraṃ āyanaṃ gamanakāraṇaṃ etassāti daṇḍaparāyanaṃ. Ṭhānādīsu daṇḍo gati avassayo etassa tena vinā appavattanatoti daṇḍagatikaṃ, gacchati etenāti vā gati, daṇḍo gati gamanakāraṇaṃ etassāti daṇḍagatikaṃ. Daṇḍapaṭisaraṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Jarāturanti jarāya kilantaṃ assavasaṃ. Yadā ratho purato hotīti dvedhāpathe sampatte purato gacchante balakāye tattha ekaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ āruḷho majjhe gacchanto bodhisattena āruḷho ratho itaraṃ saṇṭhānaṃ gacchanto yadā purato hoti. Pacchā balakāyoti tadā pacchā hoti sabbo balakāyo. Tādise okāseti tādise vuttappakāre maggappadese. Taṃ purisanti taṃ jiṇṇapurisaṃ. Suddhāvāsāti siddhatthādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ sāsane brahmacariyaṃ caritvā suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ nibbattabrahmāno. Te hi tadā tattha tiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Kiṃ paneso jiṇṇo nāmā’’ti eso tayā vuccamāno kiṃ atthato, taṃ me niddhāretvā kathehīti dasseti. Aniddhāritasarūpattā hi tassa attano bodhisatto liṅgasabbanāmena taṃ vadanto ‘‘ki’’nti āha. ‘‘Yathā kiṃ te jāta’’nti dvayameva hi loke yebhuyyato jāyati itthī vā puriso vā, tathāpi taṃ liṅgasabbanāmena vuccati, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi tassa aniddhāritasarūpataṃyeva vibhāveti.
“既然如此”这一段,是在说明大士生起警觉的方式:“这个衰老的状态是一切众生共有的,所以将来也一定会落到我头上。”
“驾车”就是御者。
“园林”:为了游玩、休闲而前往远离住所的地方,就叫园林。
“alam”是表示拒绝的词。
“nāma”是表示呵责的语气词,就像在“云何名为……”这类句子里的用法一样。
为了显示出生的过患,这就像要把它的根挖掉一样;因为老正是以出生为根源,所以说“他坐着挖掉出生的根”。因为因一旦成立,果自然也就成立。
他坐下时,就像胸口被第一支箭射中一样:那支箭生出逼迫之苦,以刺入内部的方式,最先进入并停留在心脏上。巴利
‘‘Tena hī’’tiādi ‘‘ayañca jiṇṇabhāvo sabbasādhāraṇattā mayhampi upari āpattito evā’’ti mahāsattassa saṃvijjanākāravibhāvanaṃ. Rathaṃ sāretīti sārathi. Kīḷāvihāratthaṃ uyyuttā yanti upagacchanti etanti uyyānaṃ. Alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Nāmāti garahaṇe nipāto ‘‘kathañhināmā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 39, 42, 87, 88, 90, 166, 170; pāci. 1, 13, 36) viya. Jātiyā ādīnavadassanatthaṃ taṃmūlassa ummūlanaṃ viya hotīti, tassa ca avassitabhāvato ‘‘jātiyā mūlaṃkhaṇanto nisīdī’’ti āha. Siddhe hi kāraṇe phalaṃ siddhameva hotīti. Pīḷaṃ janetvā antotudanavasena sabbapaṭhamaṃ hadayaṃ anupavissa ṭhitattā paṭhamena sallena hadayeviddho viya nisīdīti yojanā.
病人形象的注释巴利
Byādhipurisavaṇṇanā
47 就像前面说过的那样:也就是按照前面讲过的“净居天据说……”等等那一套同样的方式。“有病者”:就是患病的人。“苦者”:就是已经生起痛苦的人。“未生”:就是未生的状态,或者指涅槃。巴利
47.Pubbevuttanayenevāti ‘‘suddhāvāsā kirā’’tiādinā pubbe vutteneva nayena. Ābādhikanti ābādhavantaṃ. Dukkhitanti sañjātadukkhaṃ. Ajātanti ajātabhāvo, nibbānaṃ vā.
死者注释巴利
Kālakatapurisavaṇṇanā
50 把各种破碎、弯曲等做成种种样子,因为可以拿来使用,所以叫“vilāta”,也就是轿子、肩舆,因此说“vilāta 就是轿子”。菩萨以前见过轿子,所以把火葬的柴堆叫作“轿子”。“从此离去”,就是从此有离开。“已作终”,就是寿命已经结束。因此接着说“多少”等等。巴利
50. Bhantanettakuppalādi vividhaṃ katvā lātabbato vilāto, vayhaṃ, sivikā cāti āha ‘‘vilātanti sivika’’nti. Sivikāya diṭṭhapubbattā mahāsatto citakapañjaraṃ ‘‘sivika’’nti āha. Ito paṭigatanti ito bhavato apagataṃ . Katakālanti pariyosāpitajīvanakālaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yattaka’’ntiādi.
53 “行法”就是奉行法,这样的人叫“法行者”;他的状态就是“法行状态”,说的其实就是“法行”本身。每一个词都要这样搭配理解:就像“善法行就是出家者”这样连接,同样,“善等行就是出家者”等等,也应该明白每一个词各自的搭配方式。“所有”是指在“善法行”等说法中出现的所有法、等、善、福这些词。“十善业道的同义词”是指布施等十种善法的不同名称。巴利
53. Dhammaṃ caratīti dhammacaraṇo, tassa bhāvo dhammacaraṇabhāvoti dhammacariyameva vadati. Evaṃ ekekassa padassāti yathā ‘‘sādhudhammacariyāti pabbajito’’ti yojanā, evaṃ ‘‘sādhusamacariyāti pabbajito’’tiādinā ekekassa padassa yojanā veditabbā. Sabbānīti ‘‘sādhudhammacariyā’’tiādīsu āgatāni sabbāni dhammasamakusalapuññapadāni. Dasakusalakammapathavevacanānīti dānādīni dasakusaladhammapariyāyapadāni.
菩萨出家义释巴利
Bodhisattapabbajjāvaṇṇanā
54 54. “听闻出家人所说的法语”——这是语义上的关联。此外,他当时所说的、未被收入结集的法语,也要一并连接起来理解。“Vaṃsovā”这三个词,是在说明这是法尔自然的规律。因为寿命很长,所以要很久很久才能见到一次。正如经文所说:“经过许多年……之后。”正是由于这个缘故,并非仅仅因为很久才见到。为了说明相隔不久的前时动作,他说“看见老人……看见出家人之后,我因此出家,大王”,就像说“沐浴、穿衣、涂香、戴花、进食”一样。巴利
54. Pabbajitassa dhammiṃ kathaṃ sutvāti sambandho. Aññañca saṅgītianāruḷhaṃ tena tadā vuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathanti yojanā. ‘‘Vaṃsovā’’ti padattayena dhammatā esāti dasseti. Cirassaṃ cirassaṃ passanti dīghāyukabhāvato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bahūnaṃ vassānaṃ…pe… accayenā’’ti. Tenevāti na cirassaṃ diṭṭhabhāveneva. Acirakālantarikameva pubbakālakiriyaṃ dassento ‘‘jiṇṇañca disvā…pe… pabbajitañca disvā, tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rājā’’ti āha yathā ‘‘nhatvā vatthaṃ paridahitvā gandhaṃ vilimpitvā mālaṃ piḷandhitvā bhutto’’ti.
对大众跟随出家的注释巴利
Mahājanakāyaanupabbajjāvaṇṇanā
55 “为什么在这里”等话,说明那八万四千众生和菩萨关系亲密,也说明他们心中充满紧迫感。因为他们就站在听闻佛法的地方,没有向任何亲友打招呼,就像一头醉象挣断坚固的铁链一样,直接出家了。巴利
55.‘‘Kasmāpanetthā’’tiādinā tesaṃ caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ mahāsatte saṃbhattataṃ, saṃvegabahulatañca dasseti, yato sutaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhatvā ñātimittādīsu kiñci anāmantetvā mattavaravāraṇo viya ayomayabandhanaṃ ghanabandhanaṃ chinditvā pabbajjaṃ upagacchiṃsu.
他游行了四个月,那时他的智慧还没有成熟。巴利
Cattāro māse cārikaṃ cari na tāva ñāṇassa paripākaṃ gatattā.
当智慧成熟时,为了说明这一点,就说了“而这一位……”等话。他的意思是:所有这些出家人都会知道我要离开,知道之后就会跟随着我。集会群中,就是指聚集共坐的人群。似在鸣响,意思是好像在鸣响,好像在发出声音。巴利
Yadā pana ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gataṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Sabbeva ime pabbajitā mama gamanaṃ jānissanti, jānantā ca maṃ anubandhissantīti adhippāyo. Sannisīvesūti sannisinnesu. Saṇatevāti saṇati viya saddaṃ karoti viya.
“不乐于远离”是指不喜欢远离独处。“这个时候”是指那些出家人还不知道我要离开的时候。“出去之后”是指从叶屋出来;不过,大出离其实一大早就已经出发了。由于巴拉密的力量,上方有诸天神用天界的坐具铺设得很好,但这也是因为菩萨的福德之力所成就,所以看起来就像是菩萨自己铺设的一样,因此说“铺好盘腿坐垫”。他下定决心,修习经中所说的“即使只剩下皮、筋、骨……”这样的四种精进。“远离而住”就是住在远离之处。巴利
Avivekārāmānanti anabhirativivekānaṃ. Ayaṃ kāloti ayaṃ tesaṃ pabbajitānaṃ mama gamanassa ajānanakālo. Nikkhamitvāti paṇṇasālāya niggantvā, mahābhinikkhamanaṃ pana pageva nikkhanto. Pāramitānubhāvena uṭṭhitaṃ upari devatāhi dibbapaccattharaṇehi supaññattampi mahāsattassa puññānubhāvena siddhattā tena paññattaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ paññapetvā’’ti. ‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22, 237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) nayappavattaṃ caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā. Vūpakāsanti vivekavāsaṃ.
“向别处”是指大士当时所住之处以外的另一个方向。虽然菩提道场确实位于赡部洲中央的脐位,但那时那里是一片大森林,寂静无人,适合瑜伽行者独自静修。而赡部洲的其他地方,大多数人口稠密、人烟众多,富裕繁荣。因此,他们为了那个地方、那个地区而出发,所以说“朝赡部洲境内游行而去”,意思是朝着赡部洲境内的方向,而不是朝着雪山等山脉的方向。巴利
Aññenevāti yattha mahāpuriso tadā viharati, tato aññeneva disābhāgena. Kāmaṃ bodhimaṇḍo jambudīpassa majjhe nābhiṭṭhāniyo, tadā pana brahāraññe vivitte yogīnaṃ paṭisallānasāruppo hutvā tiṭṭhati, tadañño pana jambudīpappadeso yebhuyyena bahujano ākiṇṇamanusso iddho phīto ahosi. Tena te taṃ taṃ janapadadesaṃ uddissa gatā ‘‘anto jambudīpābhimukhā cārikaṃ pakkantā’’ti vuttā anto jambudīpābhimukhā, na himavantādipabbatābhimukhāti attho.
菩萨决意(投身修行)的注释巴利
Bodhisattaabhinivesavaṇṇanā
57 世尊成佛后,确实在那里度过了七个七天,但最初是针对毗舍佉月的满月日才说“他进入了一夜的安住”。“独处”指去到远离人群的僻静之处,这是说明大士因为没有众人聚集的喧闹而具有身远离。“隐居”指心从种种所缘的游移中退回,正确地沉隐于其中,心不向外散乱,这是说明因为没有心的喧闹而具有前分的心远离。“苦”指以生等为根本的苦。虽然死与再生也就是生与死,但在说了“生、死”之后又说“死、再生”,这并不是指同一生中所包含的,而是为了显示不同生中所包含的合在一起说,所以说“这一对……已说”。为什么在思惟世间陷入困境时,要依老死而限定说“老死”呢?为了解释这一点,所以说“因为”等。意思是老死最先现起。“执取”指已经开始的精勤。以缘起为门开始观修时,他对老死的执取,就像从顶端向下到达根部一样,所以说“犹如从有顶向下顺行”。巴利
57. Kāmaṃ bhagavā buddho hutvā sattasattāhāni tattheva vasi, sabbapaṭhamaṃ pana visākhapuṇṇamaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekarattivāsaṃ upagatassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Rahogatassāti raho janavivittaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatassa, tena gaṇasaṅgaṇikābhāvena mahāsattassa kāyavivekamāha. Paṭisallīnassāti nānārammaṇacārato cittassa nivattiyā pati sammadeva nilīnassa tattha avisaṭacittassa, tena cittasaṅgaṇikābhāvenassa pubbabhāgiyaṃ cittavivekamāha. Dukkhanti jātiādimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ. Kāmaṃ cutūpapātāpi jātimaraṇāni eva, maraṇajātiyova ‘‘jāyati mīyatī’’ti pana vatvā ‘‘cavati upapajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na ekabhavapariyāpannānaṃ nesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho nānābhavapariyāpannānaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ…pe… vutta’’nti. Kasmā pana lokassa kicchāpattiparivitakkane ‘‘jarāmaraṇassā’’ti jarāmaraṇavasena niyamanaṃ katanti āha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Jarāmaraṇameva upaṭṭhāti āditoti adhippāyo. Abhiniviṭṭhassāti āraddhassa. Paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanārambhe tassa jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya abhiniveso aggato yāva mūlaṃ otaraṇaṃ viyāti āha ‘‘bhavaggato otarantassa viyā’’ti.
“方便作意”是指通过方便而作意,也就是作意的生起。现在,为了从自性和生起方式两方面说明这种名为“方便作意”的如理作意,所以说了“无常等”这些内容。所谓如理作意,就是如实作意。“无常等”中的“等”字,包含了苦、无我、不净等。“此”指的是像“他这样想”所说的那样,以“当有什么存在时”等方式生起的作意。“其中任一”是指那些无常等作意中的任何一个。是哪一个呢?就是无常作意。这里说明了理由:“因为是以生灭随观的方式生起的。”凡是生起又灭去的,就是无常,因为它被生灭所限定,所以是不恒常的。而那种对无常性的了知,因为是如实作意,所以就是如理作意。“从此如理作意”是在表示原因时用的从格,因此用“以此方便作意”这个表示原因的具格来解释它的含义。“会遇”是指以如实通达的方式相会。“那又是什么呢?”是在问“那老死的原因是什么呢?”于是说“生”。在“以生为缘”等句子中,简要的意思是:菩萨在把握老死之因——“当有什么存在时,老死存在?以什么为缘而有老死?”——的时候,这样把握到不变的原因:“当那个存在时,这个就存在;当那个不存在时,这个也不存在,这就是它的原因。”于是,“当生存在时,老死就存在;以生为缘而有老死”这种把握老死之因的智慧生起,就在这智慧生起时有了会遇。“一切句”是指从“当有什么存在时,生存在”等开始,一直到识为止的九个句,即生等九支。巴利
Upāyamanasikārāti upāyena manasikaraṇato manasikārassa pavattanato. Idāni taṃ upāyamanasikārapariyāyaṃ yonisomanasikāraṃ sarūpato, pavattiākārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aniccādīni hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro nāma hotīti yāthāvato manasikārabhāvato. Aniccādīnīti ādi-saddena dukkhānattaasubhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ayanti ‘‘etadahosī’’ti evaṃ vutto ‘‘kimhi nu kho satī’’tiādinayappavatto manasikāro. Tesaṃ aññataroti tesu aniccādimanasikāresu aññataro eko. Ko pana soti? Aniccamanasikārova, tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘udayabbayānupassanāvasena pavattattā’’ti. Yañhi uppajjati ceva cavati ca, taṃ aniccaṃ udayavayaparicchinnattā addhuvanti katvā. Tassa pana tabbhāvadassanaṃ yāthāvamanasikāratāya yonisomanasikāro . Ito yonisomanasikārāti hetumhi nissakkavacananti tassa iminā ‘‘upāyamanasikārenā’’ti hetumhi karaṇavacanena atthamāha. Samāgamo ahosīti yāthāvato paṭivijjhanavasena saṅgamo ahosi. Kiṃ pana tanti kiṃ pana taṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇanti āha ‘‘jātī’’ti. ‘‘Jātiyā kho’’tiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti jarāmaraṇakāraṇaṃ pariggaṇhantassa bodhisattassa ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, asati ca na hoti, taṃ tassa kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ abyabhicārikāraṇapariggaṇhane ‘‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti yā jarāmaraṇassa kāraṇapariggāhikā paññā uppajjati, tāya uppajjantiyā samāgamo ahosīti. Sabbapadānīti ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati jāti hotī’’tiādinā āgatāni jātiādīni viññāṇapariyosānāni nava padāni.
在十二支的缘起里,这里有两支没有被取来,他想先问清楚不取这两支的原因,然后回答,所以先说明应该怎样取它们,就说“然而在这里……”等等。先取明显的、现在的有,接着取未来的,称为“第二”;在取未来之后,过去就成了第三,所以说“无明与行就是过去有”。难道这里不是也不能取未来的有吗?因为已经表明,执着是以现在为主的。确实如此,但应当这样理解:因被取时,果也就已经被取了,所以才那样说。而且在这里,未来的时域在意义上也已经被含摄了,因为后面有“以名色为缘而有六处”等包含未来世的说法。“由他们”是指由作为所缘的无明与行。不关涉、不联系,就是不与它们结合、相连。因为大人是以现在为主而执着的,这就说明了不关涉的原因。“未见的”就是未觉了、未通达,这里是表示状态的具格。在觉了时,应当由通达而存在,所以说“不可能成为觉者”。由这位大人所见的无明与行,只是依有、取、渴爱而见的,因为它们与具有同自性、同伴随的那些法相当。《清净道论》中已经解说过,因此这里不再赘述之意。巴利
Dvādasapadike paṭiccasamuppāde idha yāni dve padāni aggahitāni, tesaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pucchitvā vissajjetukāmo tesaṃ gahetabbākāraṃ tāva dassento ‘‘ettha panā’’tiādimāha. Paccakkhabhūtaṃ paccuppannabhavaṃ paṭhamaṃ gahetvā tadanantaraṃ anāgataṃ ‘‘dutiya’’nti gahaṇe atīto tatiyo hotīti āha ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārā hi atīto bhavo’’ti. Nanu cettha anāgatassāpi bhavassa gahaṇaṃ na sambhavati paccuppannavasena abhinivesassa jotitattāti? Saccametaṃ, kāraṇe pana gahite phalaṃ gahitameva hotīti tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Api cettha anāgatopi addhā atthato saṅgahito eva, yato parato ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādinā anāgataddhasaṅgahikā desanā pavattā. Tehīti avijjāsaṅkhārehi ārammaṇabhūtehi. Na ghaṭiyati na sambajjhati. Mahāpuriso hi paccuppannavasena abhiniviṭṭhoti aghaṭane kāraṇamāha. Adiṭṭhehīti anavabuddhehi, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Sati anubodhe paṭivedhena bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘nasakkā buddhena bhavitu’’nti. Imināti mahāsattena. Teti avijjāsaṅkhārā. Bhavaupādānataṇhāvasenevāti bhavaupādānataṇhādassanavaseneva. Diṭṭhā taṃsabhāvataṃsahagatehi tehi samānayogakkhamattā. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.570) kathitāva, tasmā na idha kathetabbāti adhippāyo.
58 缘,是指因,也就是行的意思。因为在“当有什么存在时,老死才存在?”这样的追问中,是顺着因的相续来说明果的相续的。在“当有什么存在时,识才存在?”的探究中,如果作为识的特殊原因的行没有被把握住,那么识就会从那行退转——这里说的退转,并不是从一切缘退转。所以经中说:“当名色存在时,识才存在。”这里的名,也是指以俱生等方式作为缘,而不是以业为依止的方式,因为经文已经表明,这里强调的是以现在为主。“从所缘”这句话,意思是“从被称为无明和行的所缘”,或者“从被称为过去世的所缘”。因为无明和行属于过去时域。当识退转时,也就是从过去世退转。“两者”是指结生识和观识。“不超出名色”,意思是识不会超出作为缘和作为所缘的名色,因为没有名色,识就无法生起。因此说“不超出名色而更往他处去”。巴利
58.Paccayatoti hetuto, saṅkhāratoti attho. ‘‘Kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hotī’’tiādinā hi hetuparamparāvasena phalaparamparāya vuccamānāya ‘‘kimhi nu kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti vicāraṇāya ‘‘saṅkhāre kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti viññāṇassa visesakāraṇabhūte saṅkhāre aggahite tato viññāṇaṃ paṭinivattati nāma, na sabbapaccayato. Tenevāha ‘‘nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.58), nāmampi cettha sahajātādivaseneva paccayabhūtaṃ adhippetaṃ, na kammūpanissayavasena paccuppannavasena abhinivisassa jotitattā. Ārammaṇatoti avijjāsaṅkhārasaṅkhātaārammaṇato, atītabhavasaṅkhātaārammaṇato vā. Atītaddhapariyāpannā hi avijjāsaṅkhārā. Yato paṭinivattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ atītabhavatopi paṭinivattati nāma. Ubhayampīti paṭisandhiviññāṇampi vipassanāviññāṇampi. Nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamatīti paccayabhūtaṃ, ārammaṇabhūtañca nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamati tena vinā avattanato. Tenāha ‘‘nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchatī’’ti.
当名色成为识的缘时,意思是:当名成为识的缘、成为色的缘、成为名色的缘时。同样地,当识成为名色的缘时,意思是:当名、当色、当名色成为识的缘时。这里应当根据具体情况,按照四蕴有、一蕴有、五蕴有等不同生命形态来理解其关联。而“当这两者互为缘时”这一句,则纯粹是就五蕴有来说的。就是这样,依靠识与名色相互支持而运转,才有“或者生起……或者再生”的说法,也就是被称为“有情出生……有情再生”。这是因为,离开识与名色,并没有一个被称为“有情”的实法可以作为安立的基础。因此说“由此……”等。就是这个,指的就是识与名色这两者而已。巴利
Viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honteti viññāṇe nāmassa, rūpassa, nāmarūpassa ca paccaye honte. Nāmarūpe ca viññāṇassa paccaye honteti tathā nāme, rūpe, nāmarūpe ca viññāṇassa paccaye honteti catuvokāraekavokārapañcavokārabhavavasena yathārahaṃ yojanā veditabbā, dvīsupi aññamaññapaccayesu hontesūti pana pañcavokārabhavavaseneva. Ettakenāti evaṃ viññāṇa nāmarūpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ upatthambhanavasena pavattiyā. Jāyetha vā…pe… upapajjetha vāti ‘‘satto jāyati…pe… upapajjati vā’’ti samaññā hoti viññāṇanāmarūpavinimuttassa sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtassa dhammassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ito hī’’tiādi. Etadevāti viññāṇaṃ, nāmarūpanti etaṃ dvayameva.
所谓“五句”,就是“或者生起”等五句。有人会问:这里第一句、第三句和第四句、第五句,在意义上难道不是没有区别吗?所以回答说:“伴随着辗转的死与结生。”接着,为了把“到此为止”这个词所表达的含义——也就是前面用“到此为止”说过的那个意思——用“即此”等语重新引出、指示出来,又说了一遍。“以顺缘相的方式”,是说先见缘法、再见缘所生法。因为缘法对于自己所产生的缘所生法所具有的缘性,就是“此缘性”“缘相”,这在“以无明为缘而有行”等中已经说过。由于它随顺轮回的流转,所以叫“顺缘相”。以摄集之心把生等一切轮回之苦总括起来把握,在圣典中就说为“苦蕴的集起”,因此说“生……苦蕴的”。巴利
Pañca padānīti ‘‘jāyetha vā’’tiādīni pañca padāni. Nanu tattha paṭhamatatiyehi catutthapañcamāni atthato abhinnānīti āha ‘‘saddhiṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhīhī’’ti. Puna taṃ ettāvatāti vuttamatthanti yo ‘‘ettāvatā’’ti padena pubbe vutto, tameva yathāvuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadida’’ntiādinā niyyātento nidassento puna vatvā. Anulomapaccayākāravasenāti paccayadhammadassanapubbakaṃ paccayuppannadhammadassanavasena. Paccayadhammānañhi attano paccayuppannassa paccayabhāvo idappaccayatā paccayākāro, so ca ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā vutto. Saṃsārappavattiyā anulomanato anulomapaccayākāro. Jātiādikaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ cittena samihitena kataṃ samūhavasena gahetvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhakkhandhassā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘jāti…pe… dukkharāsissā’’ti.
59 世尊之所以重复说“集、集”,是因为以观察集的方式,多次反复地看到识的生起。或者也可以说,“集是这样产生的”这句话并不只是在显示生起,而是像“缘起”这个词一样,这里的“集”这个词是以生起为切入点,来说明缘的状态。这里指出识等现存之法就是缘法,为了以共相把握它们、说明它们,才说“集、集”。这样一来,后面将要说的“讲‘此有故彼有’,只是对缘的认知”这句话就得到了支持。如果是这样,那“观生起的慧是明”这句话又怎么理解呢?这没有过失,因为通过以缘的方式观察生起为切入点,能够观察到生起的特征。由于见的意义而称为“眼”:即因为对集有现前观察的状态,如同眼睛,所以是眼。由于使知的意义:即如同集被正确地了知、觉了,这样成就的意义。由于了知的意义:即“由于识等的种种缘而生起,这就是苦蕴的集”,从各方面了知的意义。由于穿透、通达而后生起的意义:即之前未能穿透,而以观生起的慧穿透了对立面之法后,以“这是集”的方式,从缘、刹那和自性上通达而生起的状态。由于穿透的意义。由于照亮的意义:即由于驱散遮蔽集之自性的痴暗与烦恼暗而照亮的状态。巴利
59. Dukkhakkhandhassa anekavāraṃ samudayadassanavasena viññāṇassa pavattattā ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āmeḍitavacanaṃ avoca. Atha vā ‘‘evaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti idaṃ na kevalaṃ nibbattinidassanapadaṃ, atha kho paṭiccasamuppāda-saddo viya samuppādamukhena idha samudaya-saddo nibbattimukhena paccayattaṃ vadati. Viññāṇādayo bhavantā idha paccayadhammā niddiṭṭhā, te sāmaññarūpena byāpanicchāvasena gaṇhanto ‘‘samudayo samudayo’’ti āha, evañca katvā yaṃ vakkhati ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti paccayasañjānanamattaṃ kathita’’nti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.59) taṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘udayadassanapaññā vesā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Nāyaṃ doso paccayato udayadassanamukhena nibbattilakkhaṇadassanassa sambhavato. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvena cakkhu viyāti cakkhu. Ñātakaraṇaṭṭhenāti yathā samudayo sammadeva ñāto hoti avabuddho, evaṃ karaṇaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘viññāṇāditaṃtaṃpaccayuppattiyā etassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti pakārato jānanaṭṭhena. Nibbijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā uppannaṭṭhenāti anibbijjhitvā pubbe udayadassanapaññāya paṭipakkhadhamme nibbijjhitvā ‘‘ayaṃ samudayo’’ti paccayato, khaṇato ca, sarūpato paṭivijjhitvā uppannabhāvena, nibbijjhanaṭṭhena paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena vijjāti vuttaṃ hoti. Obhāsaṭṭhenāti samudayasabhāvapaṭicchādanakassa mohandhakārassa ca kilesandhakārassa ca vidhamanavasena avabhāsakabhāvena.
现在,为了按顺序说明前面所说的含义,所以说了“如所说”等这些话。其中,“眼生起了”是从巴利经文里摘出来的词句。如果有人问“是怎样生起的呢”,就回答“以见的方面”。“以对集现前观察的状态”这句话,说的是已经解释过的含义。按照这个方法,其余词句的含义也应该这样理解。“眼法”就是巴利圣典中说的“眼”。“见的方面”就是“义”,也就是见的自性,是由它来说明那个义。其余的词句也同样是这个道理。“以这些词句”就是指以这五个词句。接着问“说了什么”,是在问整体的含义。“仅仅是对缘的认知”,是说对于识等缘法、由名色等缘所生起的缘的自性,仅仅是这样一种认知,因为这里无差别地阐明了辨认缘的自性。由于阐明了正确观察诸行的生起,所以也说“处于运作过程中的稚嫩观被说了”。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ paṭipāṭiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhuṃ udapādīti pāḷiyaṃ paduddhāro. Kathaṃ udapādīti ceti āha ‘‘dassanaṭṭhenā’’ti. ‘‘Samudayassa paccakkhato dassanabhāvenāti vutto vāyamattho. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Cakkhudhammoti cakkhūti pāḷidhammo. Dassanaṭṭho atthoti dassanasabhāvo tena pakāsetabbo attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ettakehi padehīti imehi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Kiṃ kathita’’nti piṇḍatthaṃ pucchati. Paccayasañjānanamattanti viññāṇādīnaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ nāmarūpādipaccayuppannassa paccayasabhāvasañjānanamattaṃ kathitaṃ avisesato paccayasabhāvasallakkhaṇassa jotitattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ sammadeva udayadassanassa jotitattā ‘‘vīthipaṭipannā taruṇavipassanā kathitā’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
61 因为是自己证得的,又贴近现前,所以用“此”来说。圣道等因为具有寻求、通向的作用,所以叫“道”。这其实是前行阶段的观,因此说“为了觉悟”。考虑到“觉悟”这个词是表示状态成就的,所以说“为了觉悟四圣谛”。遍知、断除、修习、现观,全都只是为了作证现观、为了证得涅槃,所以说“或者正是为了觉悟涅槃”,因为梵行的目的就在于此。经里确实说过“涅槃是最高的乐”。所谓觉悟,就是以一次通达而通达四圣谛,因此“觉悟”这个词是表示行为主体的。用表达主格的词句,也就是用表达第一格的词句来说。涅槃本身被说到,是因为识等在这里灭尽。无生起的灭,就是由一切缘的灭尽而不再生起,是究竟的灭。巴利
61. Attanā adhigatattā āsannapaccakkhatāya ‘‘aya’’nti vuttaṃ, ariyamaggādīnaṃ magganaṭṭhena maggoti. Pubbabhāgavipassanā hesā. Tenāha ‘‘bodhāyā’’ti. Bodhapadassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘catusaccabujjhanatthāyā’’ti. Pariññāpahānabhāvanābhisamayā yāvadeva sacchikiriyābhisamayatthā nibbānādhigamatthattā brahmacariyavāsassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānabujjhanatthāya eva vā’’ti. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215, 217; dha. pa. 204) hi vuttaṃ. Bujjhatīti cattāri ariyasaccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, tena bodha-saddassa kattusādhanattamāha. Paccattapadehīti paṭhamāvibhattidīpakehi padehi. Nibbānameva kathitaṃ viññāṇādi nirujjhati etthāti katvā. Anibbattinirodhanti sabbaso paccayanirodhena anuppādanirodhaṃ accantanirodhaṃ.
62 “以所有这些词句”指的是“眼”等五个词句。“仅仅是认知灭”是说,像“灭、灭”这样,仅仅讲述了对灭的认知,因为这是初始阶段,还没有通过通达而亲自见到灭,因为圣道尚未证得。对诸行的如实灭的观察,应当理解为是通过达到顶峰的观来实现的,所以说“讲述了导向出起的强力观”。巴利
62.Sabbeheva etehi padehīti ‘‘cakkhū’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. Nirodhasañjānanamattamevāti ‘‘nirodho nirodhoti kho’’tiādinā nirodhassa sañjānanamattameva kathitaṃ pubbārambhabhāvato, na tassa paṭivijjhanavasena paccakkhato dassanaṃ ariyamaggassa anadhigatattā. Saṅkhārānaṃ sammadeva nirodhadassanaṃ nāma sikhāppattāya vipassanāya vasena icchitabbanti ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī balavavipassanā kathitā’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
63 “知已”是指以前分阶段的智慧来了知。“此后”是指在后面那个阶段,也就是按照前面所说的方式,在了知缘灭尽之后。“对于成为取之缘的诸法”是指对于以所缘缘等方式成为四种取之缘的那些法,也就是可执取的法。“正在运转”是指持续不断地转起。“于后时”等话语,就是这个意思。为什么要这样说呢?是为了表明:一切大菩萨在最后一生中,都是依着这条修行道路而精进求觉悟的,而这里的观修正是大菩萨们同样修习的。因此他说“一切”等。其中,儿子出生那天的大出离以及精进修行,应当理解为法尔自然的必然;其余的事情,则是按照应当如此去做的必然来理解。在那里,由于长时间修习、反复串习而获得的大悲所激励的心,想要把那些感叹“这世界确实陷入了困苦”的众生从轮回之苦中救拔出来,于是以观察困苦的显现为入口,从老死开始思察缘起的行相,这也是法尔自然的必然。同样,由于入出息念业处具有自主性、不被任何人破坏、是纯粹无杂的乐住、并且属于第四禅,所以从事入出息念的修习。“在五蕴上专注之后”是指在以识、名色等不同方式所摄的五取蕴上,以观的力量专注投入,开始修行。“次第”是指因为要一步一步跟随、一步一步修行,所以名为“次第”,也就是循序渐进地修行。“作已”是指已经修行了。巴利
63.Viditvāti pubbabhāgiyena ñāṇena jānitvā. Tato aparabhāgeti vuttanayena paccayanirodhajānanato pacchābhāge. Upādānassa paccayabhūtesūti catubbidhassapi upādānassa ārammaṇapaccayādinā paccayabhūtesu, upādāniyesūti attho . Vahantoti pavattento. Idanti ‘‘aparena samayenā’’tiādi vacanaṃ. Kasmā vuttanti ‘‘yāya paṭipattiyā sabbepi mahābodhisattā carimabhave bodhāya paṭipajjanti, vipassanāya mahābodhisattena tatheva paṭipanna’’nti kathetukamyatāvasena pucchāvacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbeyeva hī’’tiādi. Tattha puttassa jātadivase mahābhinikkhamanaṃ, padhānānuyogo ca dhammatāvasena veditabbo, itaraṃ itikattabbatāvasena. Tatthāpi cirakālaparibhāvanāya laddhāsevanāya mahākaruṇāya sañcoditamānasattā ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) saṃsāradukkhato mocetuṃ icchitassa sattalokassa kicchāpattidassanamukhena jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya paccayākārasammasanampi dhammatāva. Tathā attādhīnatāya, kenaci anupakhatattā, asecanakasukhavihāratāya, catutthajjhānikatāya ca ānāpānakammaṭṭhānānuyogo. Pañcasu khandhesu abhinivisitvāti viññāṇanāmarūpādipariyāyena gahitesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu vipassanābhinivesavasena abhinivisitvā paṭipattiṃ ārabhitvā. Anukkamanti anu anu gāmitabbato paṭipajjitabbato ‘‘anukkama’’nti laddhanāmaṃ anupubbapaṭipattiṃ. Katvāti paṭipajjitvā.
在“如是色”这句话里,第二个“iti”是用来举例的,所以第一个“iti”是在显示色自身的本性以及它的范围。由于虚词有多种含义,也可以从重复等方式来理解这里的意思。为了说明其中所含的确定语句,他说:“这是色,色只有这么多,超出这个之外就没有色了”等等。其中,“坏散的本性”这一句,是从总体上显示色的本性;“大种及所造色的分类”等,则是从特殊方面显示。通过这两方面,“这是色”这句话的含义就被指明了。其中,“相”是指每一种色各自独有、不共通的本性。“味”是指它作为自身果报之缘的状态。“现起”是指因为它以究竟义存在,所以如实成为智慧所缘境的状态。“足处”是近因,由此显示它依缘而存在。“无余地把握色”这一句,则指示了“色只有这么多,超出这个之外就没有色”这两句的含义,因为它是以完全穷尽色来作出确定的。在“如是色的集起”中,这里的“iti”就像“比丘们,愚人有怖畏,就是这样”等句中的“iti”一样,是“如此、这样”的意思,所以他说:“iti就是‘如是’的意思。”巴利
Iti rūpanti ettha dutiyo iti-saddo nidassanattho, tena paṭhamo iti-saddo sarūpassa, parimāṇassa ca bodhako anekatthattā nipātānaṃ,āvuttiādivasena vāyamattho veditabbo. Antogadhāvadhāraṇañca vākyaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthī’’tiādimāha . Tattha ‘‘ruppanasabhāva’’nti iminā sāmaññato rūpassa sabhāvo dassito, ‘‘bhūtupādāyabheda’’ntiādinā visesato, tadubhayenapi ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti padassa attho niddiṭṭho. Tattha lakkhaṇaṃ nāma tassa tassa rūpavisesassa anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo. Raso tasseva attano phalaṃ pati paccayabhāvo. Paccupaṭṭhānaṃ tassa paramatthato vijjamānattā yāthāvato ñāṇassa gocarabhāvo. Padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ, tenassa paccayāyattavuttitā dassitā. ‘‘Anavasesarūpapariggaho’’ti iminā pana ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ’’ rūpaṃ natthīti padadvayassāpi attho niddiṭṭho rūpassa sabbaso pariyādānavasena niyāmanato. ‘‘Iti rūpassa samudayo’’ti ettha pana iti-saddo ‘‘iti kho bhikkhave sappaṭibhayo bālo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.124; a. ni. 3.1) viya pakāratthoti āha ‘‘itīti eva’’nti.
“无明集”是指无明的生起,也就是存在的状态,这是它的含义。因为“灭”中的“生起”也可以表达存在的状态,所以,当先前世已经成立的无明存在时,在这一世中就有了色的集起、色的生起,这就是它的含义。“渴爱集”等说法也是同样的道理。在“食集”这里,因为在推动生命延续的诸缘中,段食的力量最强,所以只取了它。但取了它之后,由于推动生命延续的诸缘有共通性,时节和心等也就实际上被一并包含了,因此应当这样理解:对于由四种原因所生的色,从缘的角度来看它的生起,就已经被阐明了。以“生起之相”等,是从时间的角度来说明对生起的观察。其中,“生起之相”是指色被称为生起的那种有为之相。即使是在观察时,也不仅仅是缘的集起,确切地说,也是在从刹那的角度观察生起。因为先是从时间段落上观察生起而安住,然后再从相续上观察,之后渐次地从刹那上观察。“无明灭故色灭”:由于以最高之道使无明不再生起的灭,未来色的不再生起的灭就出现了,因为缘不存在时果就不存在。“渴爱灭故业灭”这里也是同样的道理。“食灭故”:由于推动生命延续的缘——段食的不存在。“色灭”:即由那食所生的色不存在。其余如前所说。“变异之相”:这是从坏灭的时间角度来观察灭,因此,先是从时间段落上观察之后,再从相续上观察,之后渐次地从刹那上观察。这个理路是就一般观禅修行者而说的,但菩萨们没有这种观法。在观察生起时也是同样的理路。巴利
Avijjāsamudayāti avijjāya uppādā, atthibhāvāti attho. Nirodhanirodhī hi uppādo atthibhāvavācakopi hoti, tasmā purimabhavasiddhāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpasamudayo, rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. ‘‘Taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Āhārasamudayāti ettha pana pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkārāhārassa balavatāya so eva gahito. Tasmiṃ pana gahite pavattipaccayatāsāmaññena utucittāni gahitāneva hontīti catusamuṭṭhānikarūpassa paccayato udayadassanaṃ vibhāvitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Nibbattilakkhaṇa’’ntiādinā kālavasena udayadassanamāha. Tattha nibbattilakkhaṇanti rūpassa uppādasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. Passantopīti na kevalaṃ paccayasamudayameva, atha kho khaṇato udayaṃ passantopi. Addhāvasena hi paṭhamaṃ udayaṃ passitvā ṭhito puna santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti aggamaggena avijjāya anuppādanirodhato anāgatassa rūpassa anuppādanirodho hoti paccayābhāve abhāvato. Taṇhānirodhā kammanirodhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Āhāranirodhāti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāvena. Rūpanirodhoti taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa abhāvo hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. ‘‘Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇa’’nti bhaṅgakālavasena hetaṃ vayadassanaṃ, tasmā taṃ addhāvasena paṭhamaṃ passitvā puna santativasena disvā anukkamena khaṇavasena passati. Ayañca nayo pākatikavipassakavasena vutto, bodhisattānaṃ panetaṃ natthi. Esa nayo udayadassanepi.
对于“如是受”等说法,也应该按照前面讲诸色时所说的方式来理解它的含义。所以他说“这是受,这是受的多少”等等。其中,在“感受……的自性”等处,应当把“自性”这个词分别搭配起来:“感受的自性……了知的自性”。“感受的自性”就是领纳的自性。“想知的自性”就是通过“这是蓝色、黄色”等方式标记所缘的自性。“造作的自性”就是积聚造作的自性。“了知的自性”就是认知所缘的自性。以“乐等”的“等”字,包含了苦受、悦受、忧受、舍受。以“色想等”的“等”字,包含了声想等等。以“触等”的“等”字,包含了思、寻等等。以“眼识等”的“等”字,包含了一切世间识。就像在识蕴中一样,这个方式在受蕴等当中也同样适用。“它们的”:指的是那些被称为“集”的法。“在三蕴中”:指的是在受蕴、想蕴、行蕴中。因为经中说“被触者感受,被触者想,被触者思”,所以应当说“触集”。又因为说“由名色为缘而有识”,所以在识蕴中应当说“名色集”。所谓“就是它们的”,意思是在三蕴中,以“触的”;在识蕴中,以“名色的”——“灭没”这个词也应该搭配到触和名色本身上;至于无明等,则和前面在诸色中所说的一样,这是他的意图。巴利
‘‘Iti vedanā’’tiādīsupi heṭṭhā rūpe vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ vedanā, ettakā vedanā’’tiādi. Tattha vedayita…pe… sabhāvanti ettha ‘‘vedayitasabhāvaṃ…pe… vijānanasabhāva’’nti paccekaṃ sabhāva- saddo yojetabbo. Vedayitasabhāvanti anubhavanasabhāvaṃ. Sañjānanasabhāvanti ‘‘nīlaṃ pīta’’ntiādinā ārammaṇassa sallakkhaṇasabhāvaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇasabhāvanti āyūhanasabhāvaṃ. Vijānanasabhāvanti ārammaṇassa upaladdhisabhāvaṃ. Sukhādīti ādi-saddena dukkhasomanassadomanassupekkhāvedanānaṃ saṅgaho rūpasaññādīti ādi-saddena saddasaññādīnaṃ, phassādīti ādi-saddena cetanā vitakkādīnaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnanti ādi-saddena sabbesaṃ lokiyaviññāṇānaṃ saṅgaho. Yathā ca viññāṇe, esa nayo vedanādīsupi. Tesanti ‘‘samudayo’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ. Tīsu khandhesūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhesu. ‘‘Phuṭṭho vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vacanato ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Nāmarūpapaccayāpi viññāṇa’’nti (vibha. 246; dī. ni. 2.97) vacanato viññāṇakkhandhe ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tesaṃ yevāti tīsu khandhesu ‘‘phassassa viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpassā’’ti phassanāmarūpānaṃyeva vasena atthaṅgamapadampi yojetabbaṃ, avijjādayo pana rūpe vuttasadisā evāti adhippāyo.
以五十种相来说:依缘有二十种,依刹那有五种,一共二十五种,是生起的相;依缘有二十种,依刹那有五种,一共二十五种,是灭尽的相;合起来就是五十种生灭的相。其中,五蕴的生起靠这些来标记,所以这些被称为“相”,也就是“无明等的集起”;同样,五蕴的不再生起、彻底灭尽靠这些来标记,所以也被称为“相”,也就是“无明等的究竟灭”。至于“生起相”和“变易相”,其实就只是有为法的相。这样,这五十种相应当从它们各自的自性来了知。“随着次第增长时”:就是说,像前面所说的生灭智变得锐利、勇猛、清净而持续运转之后,接下来应当说的坏灭智等依次生起,智慧达到顶点、观智达到最殊胜的时候。首先,以三十六万亿百千种门径运转、与一切知智相称、被称为大金刚智的思择智,已经积聚了它的威力,像胎儿一样被摄养而逐渐成熟,这是经过无量时间积累的慧巴拉密的力量所达到的最胜圆满的道清净智;它渐渐趋向出起,当它与圣道结合时,圣道心就依照道的次第从一切烦恼中解脱出来。正在解脱的时候,它这样解脱:也就是断除了一切所应断的障碍。对于烦恼,这被称为“连习气一起断除”的断,这种断在意义上就是“不再生起的灭”,所以说“以不再生起的灭”。从被称为漏的烦恼来说:从存在上说,直到有顶;从法上说,直到种姓法;从听闻、从运转上说,被称为漏的,就是贪、见、痴这些烦恼。这也是相的说法,在巴利文中就是“从诸漏”。但由于同属一类的缘故,心其实是从一切烦恼、一切恶法中解脱出来的。“不执取”:就是连那些烦恼的一点点痕迹也不执取。巴利
Samapaññāsalakkhaṇavasenāti paccayato vīsati khaṇato pañcāti pañcavīsatiyā udayalakkhaṇānaṃ, paccayato vīsati khaṇato pañcāti pañcavīsatiyā eva vayalakkhaṇānaṃ cāti samapaññāsāya udayavayalakkhaṇānaṃ vasena. Tattha pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayo lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇānīti vuccanti avijjādisamudayoti, tathā tesaṃ anuppādanirodho lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇānīti vuccanti avijjādīnaṃ accantanirodho. Nibbattivipariṇāmalakkhaṇāni pana saṅkhatalakkhaṇamevāti. Evaṃ etāni samapaññāsalakkhaṇāni sarūpato veditabbāni. Yathānukkamena vaḍḍhiteti yathāvuttaudayabbayañāṇe tikkhe sūre pasanne hutvā vahante tato paraṃ vattabbānaṃ bhaṅgañāṇādīnaṃ uppattipaṭipāṭiyā buddhippatte paramukkaṃsagate vipassanāñāṇe. Pageva hi chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena pavattena sabbaññutaññāṇānucchavikena mahāvajirañāṇasaṅkhātena sammasanañāṇena sambhatānubhāvaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhiñāṇaṃ aparimitakāle sambhatāya paññāpāramiyā ānubhāvena ukkaṃsapāramippattaṃ anukkamena vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvaṃ upagantvā yadā ariyamaggena ghaṭeti, tadā ariyamaggacittaṃ sabbakilesehi maggapaṭipāṭiyā vimuccati , vimuccantañca tathā vimuccati, yathā sabbañeyyāvaraṇappahānaṃ hoti. Yaṃ kilesānaṃ ‘‘savāsanappahāna’’nti vuccati, tayidaṃ pahānaṃ atthato anuppattinirodhoti āha ‘‘anuppādanirodhenā’’ti. Āsavasaṅkhātehi kilesehīti bhavato ābhavaggaṃ, dhammato āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato āsavasaññitehi rāgo, diṭṭhi, mohoti imehi kilesehi. Lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ yadidaṃ ‘‘āsavehī’’ti, tadekaṭṭhatāya pana sabbehipi kilesehi sabbehipi pāpadhammehi cittaṃ vimuccati. Aggahetvāti tesaṃ kilesānaṃ lesamattampi aggahetvā.
在道的那一刹那,叫做“正在解脱”——从各自道所应断的烦恼中解脱;在果的那一刹那,叫做“已经解脱”。或者在道的那一刹那,既是“已经解脱”又是“正在解脱”:也就是在更高一层的道那一刹那时,对于更低一层道所应断的烦恼已经解脱了,同时对于自己该断的烦恼则正在解脱。而在果的那一刹那,只是“已经解脱”——在一切果的那一刹那,都只是已经解脱的状态,不叫“正在解脱”。巴利
Maggakkhaṇe vimuccati nāma taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ nāma. Maggakkhaṇe vā vimuttañcevavimuccati cāti uparimaggakkhaṇe heṭṭhimamaggavajjhehi vimuttañceva yathāsakaṃ pahātabbehi vimuccati ca. Phalakkhaṇe vimuttamevāti sabbasmimpi phalakkhaṇe vimuttameva, na vimuccati nāma.
从一切束缚中彻底解脱,特指从包含下分结和上分结在内的一切有结中解脱出来,是以殊胜的方式解脱。心相续被善加开启,是指由于智慧光芒的殊胜触及,心相续得以极善、完全地绽放开来。所谓四圣道智等,就是那些使心相续被善加开启的智慧,这里只是用其中一部分来略作说明。全面的展示将在后面出现,所以到那里我们再详细分析。在圆满的诸佛功德中,指的是过去世无碍智等一切佛功德。因为当世间怙主证得最上道时,那时一切功德就等于已被握在手中,从此以后就称为已握在手中而安住。巴利
Sabbabandhanāti orambhāgiyuddhambhāgiyasaṅgahitā sabbasmāpi bhavasaññojanā, vippamutto visesato pakārehi mutto. Suvikasitacittasantānoti sātisayaṃ ñāṇarasmisamphassena suṭṭhu sammadeva samphullacittasantāno. ‘‘Cattāri maggañāṇānī’’tiādi yehi ñāṇehi suvikasitacittasantāno, tesaṃ ekadesena dassanaṃ. Nippadesato dassanaṃ pana parato āgamissati, tasmā tattheva tāni vibhajissāma. Sakale ca buddhaguṇeti atītaṃse appaṭihatañāṇādike sabbepi buddhaguṇe. Yadā hi lokanātho aggamaggaṃ adhigacchati, tadā sabbe guṇe hatthagate karoti nāma. Tato paraṃ ‘‘hatthagate katvā ṭhito’’ti vuccati.
说了“意欲圆满”之后,为了显示意欲圆满性而引出优陀那,于是诵出“经历多生轮回”等偈颂。其中,前两首偈颂的义理,在前面《梵网经》因缘注释中已经讲过。接下来,“被铁锤所击者”中,铁锤就是用来打铁的东西,是铁匠的铁槌和铁锤,被这铁锤所击打、所捶打。这里的“eva”只是个小品词。“燃烧的火焰”是指正在燃烧的火;或者这是表示不敬的属格用法。“渐次平息者”是指按次序平息、被镇伏、被灭尽的。所谓“如同不知其去处”,就是说它的去向不可知。这里说的是:就像被铁槌、铁锤等击打过的铁块中的火,或者放在铜器等中燃烧的火,渐次平息之后,由于缘灭而无结生、已灭尽,所以在十方任何地方都看不到它的去处。同样,“善解脱者”是以正确的方法、以圣道,以彼分镇伏解脱为先导的永断解脱,从四取和诸漏中解脱出来,所以是善解脱。正因如此,他们超越了称为欲缚的欲流、有流等一切剩余的暴流而安住,是渡越欲缚暴流者;一切烦恼的躁动已彻底止息,不被烦恼造作风所动摇,证得并达到了称为涅槃的行寂灭、不动之乐。那些漏尽者的趣向,在天、人等诸趣中,已不存在,无法安立为“这是某某”,所以不可得。就像前面所说的火一样,他们只是走向不可安立的状态。所谓“这样作意”,是指以“经历多生轮回”等偈颂,作意自己已完成应作之事,坐在菩提座上而放光。巴利
‘‘Paripuṇṇasaṅkappo’’ti vatvā paripuṇṇasaṅkappatāparidīpanaṃ udānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ādito dvinnaṃ gāthānamattho heṭṭhā brahmajālanidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vutto eva. Parato pana ayoghanahatassāti ayo haññati etenāti ayoghanaṃ, kammārānaṃ ayokūṭaṃ, ayomuṭṭhi ca, tena ayoghanena hatassa pahatassa. Eva-saddo cettha nipātamattaṃ. Jalato jātavedasoti jalayamānassa aggissa, anādare vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Anupubbūpasantassāti anukkamena upasantassa vikkhambhantassa niruddhassa. Yathā na ñāyate gatīti yathā tassa gati na ñāyati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayomuṭṭhikūṭādinā pahatattā ayoghanena hatassa pahatassa ayogatassa, kaṃsabhājanādigatassa vā jalamānassa aggissa anukkamena upasantassa dasasu disāsu na katthaci gati paññāyati paccayanirodhena appaṭisandhikaniruddhattāti. Evaṃ sammāvimuttānanti sammā hetunā ñāyena tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttipubbaṅgamāya samucchedavimuttiyā ariyamaggena catūhipi upādānehi, āsavehi ca muttattā sammā vimuttānaṃ, tato eva kāmabandhanasaṅkhātaṃ kāmoghabhavoghādibhedaṃ avasiṭṭhaoghañca taritvā ṭhitattā kāmabandhoghatārīnaṃ suṭṭhu paṭipassambhitasabbakilesavipphanditattā kilesābhisaṅkhāravātehi akampanīyatāya acalaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukhaṃ pattānaṃ adhigatānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ gati devamanussādibhedāsu gatīsu ‘‘ayaṃ nāmā’’ti paññāpetabbatāya abhāvato paññāpetuṃ natthi na upalabbhati, yathāvuttajātavedo viya apaññattikabhāvameva te gacchantīti attho. Evaṃ manasi karontoti ‘‘evaṃ anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 153) attano katakiccattaṃ manasi karonto bodhipallaṅke nisinnova virocitthāti yojanā.
梵天劝请故事的注释巴利
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
64 “那么,我”这个词是用来表示思索、推寻的语气词。世尊用“我”来指自己,所以说“如果我又……”。“在第八个七日”等话,是为了说明:就像我们的世尊在成正觉之后,以感受解脱之乐等方式,在七个七日中那样度过,此后又以观察法义甚深等方式度过;同样地,一切正自觉者在成正觉时也都是那样度过的,而那些七日等时段也是同样确定的——这是一切诸佛的常法。因此,为了显示维巴西佛在成正觉时也那样度过,就开始讲述。其中,“在第八个七日”这一说法,是相对于第七个七日之后、以及七日之前所进行的修行实践而言说的,并不是像结跏趺坐的七日那样,因为名为第八个七日的时段并不能被确定成立。紧接着发生的是“我已证得此法”那样的思惟。巴利
64.Yannūnāti parivitakkanatthe nipāto, ahanti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisatīti āha ‘‘yadi panāha’’nti. ‘‘Aṭṭhame sattāhe’’tiādi yathā amhākaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho hutvā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanādivasena sattasu sattāhesu paṭipajji, tato parañca dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇādivasena, evameva sabbepi sammāsambuddhā abhisambuddhakāle paṭipajjiṃsu, te ca sattāhādayo tatheva vavatthapīyantīti ayaṃ sabbesampi buddhānaṃ dhammatā. Tasmā vipassī bhagavā abhisambuddhakāle tathā paṭipajjīti dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti idaṃ sattamasattāhato paraṃ, sattāhato orime ca pavattāya paṭipattiyā vasena vuttaṃ, na pallaṅkasattāhassa viya aṭṭhamassa nāma sattāhassa vavatthitassa labbhamānattā. Anantaroti ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādiko vitakko (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8).
“通达”是指以自生智,通过“这是苦”等方式,面向而通达,意思是如实觉悟。“法”是指四圣谛法,因为除了它之外,没有别的需要通达的法。“甚深”是指像大海一样,除了那些已积聚成熟智慧资粮的人以外,其他人的智慧无法立足,犹如以蚊喙之针无法立足一样。因此说“这是遮遣浅显状态的话”。因为无法立足,也就是由于无法深入,所以不能从自相和别相上看到,所以说“因为甚深,所以难见”。“以苦而见”是指要由某人艰难地、偶尔才能见到。如果连见都做不到,那么深入而逐步了悟的说法就根本不存在,所以说“因为难见,所以难了悟”。“难以了悟”是指很难被了悟,因为了悟本身很难做到。在这里应当引用经文:“比丘们,你们怎么想?什么是更难做到、更难达到的?”又因为具有寂静的所缘,所以是“寂静”。因为熄灭了一切热恼,所以是“熄灭”。因为被引向殊胜的状态,所以是“殊胜”。因为令人不满足,所以是“不厌足”,就像美味的食物一样。在这里,灭谛是寂静的所缘;道谛是寂静的、具有寂静所缘的,因为不寂静自性的烦恼和诸行都不存在,所以是寂静的;因为灭尽一切热恼,所以是熄灭的;由于寂静和殊胜本身,以及为了它而无需添味的性质,应当理解为“不厌足”。因此说“这两者是针对出世间而说的”。因为它是至上智的境界,所以不能只靠推理思辨来把握;正因为如此,它是微细智的境界,又因为具有微细、细密的特性,所以是“微细”。因为不是愚者的境界,只有智者才能了知,所以是“唯智者能知”。“所著”是指因为应当乐于其中而亲近,也就是五种欲。“著者”是指因为乐于其中而亲近,即渴爱的种种活动。“著乐者”是指乐于所著之中。“极喜者”是指极欢喜、极喜悦,因为不厌倦。“喜乐者”是指获得喜乐、嬉戏、欢娱。这些有情对五欲如此,对贪也是如此,即品尝它、欢喜它,所以说“两种”等。巴利
Paṭividdhoti sayambhuñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭimukhaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena pavatto, yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Dhammoti catusaccadhammo tabbinimuttassa paṭivijjhitabbadhammassa abhāvato. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanameta’’nti. Alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭho ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato visesato ca passituṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘gambhīrattāva duddaso’’ti. Dukkhena daṭṭhabboti kicchena kenaci kadācideva daṭṭhabbo. Yaṃ pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anu anu bujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattāva duranubodho’’ti. Dukkhena avabujjhitabbo avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) suttapadaṃ vattabbaṃ. Santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya nibbuto. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto. Atittikaraṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ, santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ, saṅkhārānañca abhāvato santo nibbutasabbapariḷāhattā nibbuto, santapaṇītabhāveneva tadatthāya asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Uttamañāṇassa visayattā na takkena avacaritabbo, tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya, saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo. Bālānaṃ avisayattā paṇḍitehi eva veditabboti paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇā. Ālayanti abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, taṇhāvicaritāni. Ālayaratāti ālayaniratā. Suṭṭhu muditā ativiya muditā anukkaṇṭhanato. Ramatīti ratiṃ vindati kīḷati laḷati. Ime sattā yathā kāmaguṇe, evaṃ rāgampi assādenti abhinandanti yevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘duvidhampī’’tiādi.
“处”这个说法,是就“处”这个词而说的。但从意义上说,这里所指的其实就是缘起。果依它而住立,因为它而得以存在,所以叫“处”,也就是作为诸行等之缘的无明等。这些诸行等的缘,就叫“此缘”,正是无明等。“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”,就像“天子”本身就是“天神”一样。或者说,无明等这些“此缘”,相对于自己的果,具有作为缘、能够令果生起的性质,这就是“此缘性”。这样一来,就显示了以究竟意义上的缘为特征的缘起。果依此而生起,所以叫“缘起”。这两个词都说明了诸法的缘义。因此说:“这是诸行之缘——无明等的异名。”这里只是简略说明,详细解释应按照《清净道论》注释中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhāna-saddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto. Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā devo eva devatā , idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ paṭicca paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā, tena paramatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenāpi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārādipaccayānaṃ avijjādīnametaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu (visuddhi. 2.570) vuttanayena veditabbo.
“一切行寂止”等句中,“一切”指的是“一切行寂止”等词所表达的一切,从究竟义来说,就是涅槃。现在为了说明它的涅槃性,才说了“因为……”等话。“彼”,就是涅槃。“依止”,是依靠、缘于的意思,即涅槃作为圣道的所缘缘之因。“寂止”,是以不再结生、彻底平息的方式而寂止。这样寂止之后,又更殊胜地成为极寂静,所以说“安息”。由此表明:一切行在这里止息,所以叫“一切行寂止”,这就是涅槃。因为在一切行离散的涅槃中,说一切行止息是合乎道理的。其余语句也应这样理解。“所依”,是苦所依止的地方,即诸蕴等。“舍离”,是以彻底断除的方式被舍弃。“一切渴爱”,指分为一百零八类的所有渴爱。“一切烦恼染”,指欲染、色染等一切属于烦恼的染,或者这里应把“烦恼染”理解为一切烦恼,而不只是贪的差别,因为它们能使心颠倒。正如所说:“染污的心是颠倒的,瞋恨的心是颠倒的,愚痴的心是颠倒的。”“离染”,是舍弃自己的本性。“一切苦”,指老死等一切轮回之苦。“以有而再有”,是以这种有而有那种有。“以有爱乐的状态而被结缚”,或者说,业与果对于有渴爱者,才会有未来后有的存在。从那渴爱出离,因为它在彼处完全不存在。由于久坐和久说,也应了知以身疲乏、身逼恼等,即背痛、腭与喉干等。而那种说法,对于不知义者、不实践者来说,是那样;但对于知者、实践者来说,说法的身劳倦,对导师来说也根本不算劳倦。因此世尊说:“法义之事不曾使我逼恼。”正如所说:“对不知者说法,那算是我的劳倦。”心劳倦和心逼恼这两者,在诸佛是没有的,因为在菩提树下就已彻底断除。巴利
Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbanti sabbasaṅkhārasamathādipadābhidheyyaṃ sabbaṃ, atthato nibbānameva. Idāni tassa nibbānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti nibbānaṃ. Āgammāti paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayahetu. Sammantīti appaṭisandhikūpasamavasena sammanti. Tathā santā ca savisesaṃ upasantā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vūpasammantī’’ti, etena sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbānanti dasseti. Sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyutte hi nibbāne sabbasaṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo ñāyāgato yevāti. Sesepadesupi eseva nayo. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhi, khandhādayo. Paṭinissaṭṭhāti samucchedavasena pariccattā honti. Sabbā taṇhāti aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā. Sabbe kilesarāgāti kāmarāgarūparāgādibhedā sabbepi kilesabhūtā rāgā, sabbepi vā kilesā idha kilesarāgāti veditabbā, na lobhavisesā eva cittassa viparītabhāvāpādanato. Yathāha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’nti (pārā. 271) virajjantīti attano sabhāvaṃ vijahanti. Sabbaṃ dukkhanti jarāmaraṇādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ. Bhavena bhavanti tena tena bhavena bhavantaraṃ. Bhavanikantibhāvena saṃsibbati, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ sataṇhasseva āyatiṃ punabbhavabhāvato. Tato vānato nikkhantaṃ tattha tassa sabbaso abhāvato. Ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesāca veditabbā. Sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānaṃ, appaṭipajjantānañca vasena, jānantānaṃ, pana paṭipajjantānañca desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesī’’ti (udā. 10). Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti. Ubhayanti cittakilamatho, cittavihesā cāti ubhayaṃ petaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi, bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā.
65 阐述与总结。“so”是“apissu”里的一个不变词。关于“维巴斯”:因为与接头词“paṭi”结合,在表示所属关系时用对格,所以解释说“维巴斯的”。是增长所成的稀有,还是不稀有?这里接头词“a”也可以表示增长之义,就像“无学诸法”中的用法一样。应当知道:为了与包括天界众生的世间分享佛法,历经四不可数又十万劫圆满诸巴拉密,如今已证得法王之位的世尊,显示出在那里不放逸的状态,这偈颂的意义稀有难得,而它的增长所成也是如此。因为从义理的角度看,这些偈颂是寻常的。“成为行境”:即现前。现前也就是应当被思量的对象,所以说“达到了应当被遍寻的程度”。巴利
65.Anubrūhanaṃ sampiṇḍanaṃ. Soti ‘‘apissū’’ti nipāto. Vipassinti paṭi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘vipassissā’’ti. Vuddhippattā acchariyā vā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi akāro hoti yathā‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikāya 11). Kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni samadhigatadhammarājassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanatā, gāthātthassa acchariyatā, tassa vuddhippatti cāti veditabbā. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Upaṭṭhānañca vitakketabbatāvāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
如果说这就是乐行道,那为什么又说它是难行道呢?为了回答这个问题,就说了“在圆满巴拉密的时候”等话。这类话是对那些能施舍难以舍弃之物的人说的。“ha”这个助词在这里表示“明白”等意思,也有人认为它表示“决定”的意思。整句的意思是:用这样艰难才证得的法来教导别人,这显然是毫无意义的,或者说是决定没有用的。“hala”和“alaṃ”是同义词,就像“我说‘hala’”等句子里的用法一样。被贪与嗔所触者:就像被毒蛇咬伤的人一样,被贪和嗔的毒所沾染、所征服。随贪与嗔者:指被贪和嗔所跟随的人。巴利
Yadi sukhāpaṭipadāva kathaṃ kicchatāti āha ‘‘pāramīpūraṇakāle’’tiādi. Evamādīni duppariccajāni dentassa. Ha-iti vā byattanti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto, ‘‘ekaṃsatthe’’ti keci. Ha byattaṃ, ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa desetunti yojanā. Halanti ‘‘ala’’nti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.172) viya. Rāgadosaphuṭṭhehīti phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena, dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehi. Rāgadosānugatehīti rāgadosehi anubandhehi.
“常等”是指执取常等观念。“如此而去”是指这样进行,以无常等形态进行。“四圣谛法”这个说法,在无常等以及诸谛中,应当根据实际所得来理解。或者说,“如此而去”的意思是:我以及其他正自觉者,这样执取“无常”等之后而去——已了知、已通达。被欲贪和有贪染污的人,因为心被诸盖遮蔽;被见贪染污的人,因为颠倒执取,不能如实见到这个法,不能通达证悟。“令其如此执取”是指让他们以“无常”等自性如实了知法。他们被贪和嗔所压倒,完全处于昏昧状态,所以说“为黑暗蕴所覆”。巴利
Niccādīnanti niccaggāhādīnaṃ. Evaṃ gatanti evaṃ pavattaṃ aniccādiākārena pavattaṃ. ‘‘Catusaccadhamma’’nti idaṃ aniccādīsu, saccesu ca yathālābhavasena gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ gatanti vā evaṃ ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā abhinivisitvā mayā, aññehi ca sammāsambuddhehi gataṃ, ñātaṃ paṭividdhanti attho. Kāmarāgena, bhavarāgena ca rattā nīvaraṇehi nivutacittatāya, diṭṭhirāgena rattā viparītābhinivesena na dakkhanti yāthāvato imaṃ dhammaṃ nappaṭivijjhissanti. Evaṃ gāhāpetunti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhamme jānāpetuṃ. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammūḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti.
为了说明对说法提不起劲的原因,世尊自己就用“那又是为什么”这样的话头,主动提出质问。这里说的是:如今这种对说法提不起劲的情况,是一切诸佛一贯的、与法性相应的常规;或者说,一切菩萨从一开始发下“我何必以不为人知的身份”等等广大誓愿时,就这样策励自己的心,这也是一贯的、与法性相应的常规。所以说了“我何必”等等。其中“以不为人知的身份”,意思是:不是成为让包括天界在内的整个世界都震动起来的佛陀,而只是以成为佛陀弟子这种不为人知的形相。对说法提不起劲的原因有三种:对立面的力量强大;法极其深奥;以及世尊对法怀有格外深重的敬重。为了显示这三点,就开始了“因为他……”等等。这里说的“对立面”,就是贪等烦恼,因为它们会障碍正确的修行。由于它们力量强大,又经过长久熏习而深植于有情的相续中,极难清除,所以它们压倒那些有情,就像醉象压倒一个软弱无力的人,使他们陷入不幸和毁灭;它们盘踞在长达数百由旬、堆积紧密、构造坚实、布满荆棘的险恶之处。为了显示它们难以清除——难以破除、难以切断——才说了“于是对他……”等等。其中,因为内部还没成熟,就像装满酸粥的葫芦;因为放置太久,就像装满酪的罐子;因为油脂滴尽而变得软弱,就像被脂油和油浸透的布;因为混了油,就像涂了油膏的手,这些都被说成难以清洗。这些低劣的比喻,是因为它们属于色法的相续,而且因为时间不长才变脏;而烦恼的染污,却因为无始以来就存在,又因为随眠潜藏,所以更加难以清洗。因此说“极其染污”。正如难以清洗一样,甚深、难见、难证悟,所说的比喻也同样只是低劣的比喻。巴利
Dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpattiyā kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā sayameva codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha yathāyaṃ idāni dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpatti sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇadhammatāvasena, sabbabodhisattānaṃ ādito ‘‘kiṃ me aññātavesenā’’tiādinā (bu. vaṃ. 2.99) mahābhinīhāre attano cittassa samussāhanaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇadhammatā vāti āha ‘‘kiṃ me’’tiādi. Tattha aññātavesenāti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ unnādento buddho ahutvā kevalaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakabhāvūpagamanavasena aññātarūpena. Tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ appossukkatāpattiyā paṭipakkhassa balavabhāvo, dhammassa paramagambhīratā, tattha ca bhagavato sātisayaṃ gāravanti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṭipakkhā nāma rāgādayo kilesā sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarattā. Tesaṃ balavabhāvato ciraparibhāvanāya sattasantānato dubbisodhiyatāya te satte mattahatthino viya dubbalaṃ purisaṃ ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādentā anekasatayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ sunicitaṃ ghanasannivesaṃ kaṇṭakaduggampi adhisenti. Dūrappabheda ducchejjatāhi dubbisodhiyataṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘athassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca anto āmaṭṭhatāya kañjikapuṇṇalābu ciraparivāsikatāya takkabharitacāṭi snehatintadubbalabhāvena vasātelapītapilotikā; telamissitatāya añjanamakkhitahatthā dubbisodhanīyā vuttā. Hīnūpamā cetā rūpappabandhabhāvato, acirakālikattā ca malīnatāya, kilesasaṃkileso eva pana dubbisodhanīyataro anādikālikattā, anusayitattā ca. Tenāha ‘‘atisaṃkiliṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā ca dubbisodhanīyatāya evaṃ gambhīraduddasaduranubodhānampi vuttaupamā hīnūpamāva.
法虽然甚深,但如果能通过对治的摧破而变得很清楚,那也是可以的;不过,摧破对治是跟正确的修行实践相连的,而正确的修行实践又依赖于听闻正法,听闻正法又取决于对导师和法的净信。这种净信,尤其是对世间值得恭敬、值得尊重的人,是以希求为因的。为了说明这一点——众生对法的实践,是以梵天劝请等为因缘——所以说了“又复……”等话。巴利
Gambhīropi dhammo paṭipakkhavidhamanena supākaṭo bhaveyya, paṭipakkhavidhamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammasavanādhīnā, taṃ satthari, dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ. So visesato loke sambhāvanīyassa garukātabbassa abhipatthanāhetukoti panāḷikāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmayācanādinimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
66 “某一位”:虽然听起来像是个不知名的人,但为了表明他其实是众所周知的,所以说“此轮围世界中的上首大梵天王”,也就是大梵天界里的上首大梵天王。就像欲界天中的帝释天神一样,他在梵天界也是众所周知、声名显赫的。“少尘垢”:为了说明这个意思——他们只有少量作为随烦恼的贪等尘垢,所以叫“少尘垢”;少尘垢者的眼睛就是慧眼,这类众生具有这样的本性,所以说“慧眼”等。应当这样理解:那些贪等尘垢少的众生,就是“少尘垢之种类者”。关于“因不听闻”:这里把“不听闻”当作原因,却用了主格形式,就像“自己证知”等说法一样,所以说“由于不听闻”。所谓“以十福业事为缘”:就是以布施等十种能令解脱成熟的福业事为缘。因此说“已作诸福德事者……”等。不过《破除迷执》中说“以十二福业事为缘”,那是在布施等十种之中,加入了皈依与利他回向这两种来说的。巴利
66. ‘‘Aññataro’’ti appaññāto viya kiñcāpi vuttaṃ, atha kho pākaṭo paññātoti dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe jeṭṭhakamahābrahmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahābrahmabhavane jeṭṭhakamahābrahmā. So hi sakko viya kāmadevaloke, brahmaloke ca pākaṭo paññāto. Upakkilesabhūtaṃ appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etassāti apparajaṃ, apparajaṃ akkhi paññācakkhu yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvāti katvā apparajakkhajātikāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paññāmaye’’tiādimāha. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Assavanatāti ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.28, 405; ma. ni. 1.154, 444) viya karaṇe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘assavanatāyā’’ti. Dasapuññakiriyavatthuvasenāti dānādidasavidhavimuttiparipācanīyapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ vasena. Tenāha ‘‘katādhikārā’’tiādi. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ pana ‘‘dvādasapuññakiriyavasenā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.282) vuttaṃ, taṃ dānādīsu saraṇagamanaparahitapariṇāmanadvaya pakkhipanavasena vuttaṃ.
69 对应当受尊重者,以恭敬之心去尊重、去请求,这本身就是一种恳求,所以经文说“请求”。这种智见只限于某个特定范围,而且是诸佛独有的,所以这两种智被称为“佛眼”,因此说“这两种智名为佛眼”。至于较低的三道智,被称为“法眼”,因为它们见到四圣谛之法,仅仅属于“见”的层面。这些智被说成像闪电一样,而最高的道智已经达到智慧作用的顶点,不再只是单纯的“见”,所以不叫“法眼”。正因如此,它被说成像金刚。“如所说之理”,也就是如“少有尘垢之种类”一句所说的道理。因为烦恼微薄者被称为“少尘垢者”,所以烦恼厚重者应知为“多尘垢者”。由于能断除对立面,所以是锐利、勇猛、明净的;反之则是柔软的。“信等种类”,就是以信等为征象;“善好”,就是美好者。然而《迷惑冰释》中说:“那些意乐等部分善好者,是善种类。”这应当理解为与这里的义注完全一致、相合。因此,从信具足等方面说意乐的善好,反之则是不善好。所谓因,就是缘相,或者诸谛。后世,就是来世。应当将彼视为如罪过一样可怖,所以说“见后世与罪过为可怖”。或者,从成就的存在说,与之不同的败坏存在被称为“后世”,所以说“见后……等”。巴利
69. Garuṭṭhāniyesu gāravavasena garukarapatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato patthanā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yācana’’nti. Padesavisayañāṇadassanaṃ hutvā buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikabhāvato idaṃ ñāṇadvayaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāma’’nti. Tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānanti heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ, catusaccadhammadassananti katvā dassanamattabhāvato. Yato tāni ñāṇāni vijjūpamābhāvena vuttāni, aggamaggañāṇaṃ pana ñāṇakiccassa sikhāppattiyā dassanamattaṃ na hotīti ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti na vuccatīti. Yato taṃ vajirūpamābhāvena vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘apparajakkhajātikā’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva. Yasmā mandakilesā ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti vuttā, tasmā bahalakilesā ‘‘mahārajakkhā’’ti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhavidhamanasamatthatāya tikkhāni sūrāni visadāni, vuttavipariyāyena mudūni. Saddhādayo ākārāti saddahanādippakāre vadati. Sundarāti kalyāṇā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘yesaṃ āsayādayo koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 814) vuttaṃ, taṃ imāya atthavaṇṇanāya aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yato saddhāsampadādivasena ajjhāsayassa sundaratāti, tabbipariyāyato asundaratāti. Kāraṇaṃ nāma paccayākāro, saccāni vā. Paralokanti samparāyaṃ. Taṃ dukkhāvahaṃ vajjaṃ viya bhayato passitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passantī’’ti. Sampattibhavato vā aññattā vipattibhavo ‘‘paraloko’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘para…pe… passantī’’ti.
这里,“这是此处的经文”这句话,是为了阐明“少尘垢”等词的含义,用这段经文来证明它确实如此。因为信等能令解脱成熟之法之所以强而有力,正是因为与它们对立的恶法薄弱;反过来,当那些恶法强而有力时,信等就变得薄弱。所以,依据令解脱成熟之法的殊胜存在与不存在,经文中以“少尘垢、多尘垢”等方式加以区分展示。这样,依信等而有五种少尘垢者,依不信等而有五种多尘垢者。如此便阐明了利根、钝根等五十种人。不过,依信等内部的不同差别,还应当知道有更多种分类。蕴等以其坏灭之义就是世间;属于成就有的世间,是成就有的世间;善趣的再生,就是成就生的世间;成就由此而生起,所以能导向善趣的业有,就是成就所生的世间。恶趣的再生有,以及能导向恶趣的业有,则是失坏有的世间和失坏所生的世间。巴利
Ayaṃpanettha pāḷīti ettha ‘‘apparajakkhā’’dipadānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ tassa tathābhāvasādhakapāḷi. Saddhādīnañhi vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ balavabhāvo tappaṭipakkhānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ dubbalabhāveneva hoti, tesañca balavabhāvo saddhādīnaṃ dubbalabhāvenāti vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ savisesaṃ atthitānatthitāvasena ‘‘apparajakkhā mahārajakkhā’’ti ādayo pāḷiyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.111) vibhajitvā dassitā. Iti saddhādīnaṃ vasena pañca apparajakkhā, asaddhiyādīnaṃ vasena pañca mahārajakkhā. Evaṃ tikkhindriyamudindriyādayoti vibhāvitā paññāsa puggalā. Saddhādīnaṃ pana antarabhedena anekabhedā veditabbā. Khandhādayo eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, sampattibhavabhūto loko sampattibhavaloko, sugatisaṅkhāto upapattibhavo, sampatti sambhavati etenāti sampattisambhavaloko sugatisaṃvattaniyo kammabhavo. Duggatisaṅkhātaupapattibhavaduggatisaṃvattaniyakammabhavā vipattibhavalokavipattisambhavalokā.
接着,为了再按一种、两种等方式分析世间并加以说明,所以说了“一个世间”等话。因为食等这些东西,是以坏灭、毁坏的意义而称为世间。其中,“一个世间:一切有情都依靠食而住”这句话,是以人为立足点来说的,它说明了所有有为法都依赖条件才能存在;因此,整个有为世间就是一个,只有一种,因为没有别的种类。在“两个世间”等说法里,也应该按这个道理来理解。这里不把涅槃算进去,因为涅槃的本性不是世间。有人会问:在“依靠食而住”这句话里,既然说的是依赖条件才能存在,那道和果不也变成世间了吗?不会。因为这里说的“世间”,指的是应当被彻底了知的苦谛诸法。或者说,凡是被执取为“不坏、不灭”的东西,如果它并不是那样,那它就是世间;对于那些不被这样执取的出世间法来说,就没有世间性。作为执取对象的诸蕴,就是取蕴。以随顺等为对象的利、衰等八种世间法,就是世间法。十处是指十种色处,因为这是针对想要厌离的人说的。对于这样的人,一切三界之业都是应当谴责、应当舍弃的,所以说“一切行都是过失,一切导向存在的业都是过失”。那些信心等很弱的人,这里就用“无信”等说法来讲。但并不是完全没有信心等,所以在“少尘垢”等五组二法中,每一组各分成十种,合起来说“以五十种方式了知这五根”。或者,世尊是从随顺和反面两方面来了知信等诸根的强弱差别。在这里,世尊以少尘垢等方式观察时,那些众生是成群成群地出现,而不是一个一个地出现。巴利
Puna ekakadukādivasena lokaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘eko loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhārādayo hi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti. Tattha ‘‘eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.303; a. ni. 10.27, 28; paṭi. ma. 1.2, 112, 208) yāyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho pakārantarassābhāvato. ‘‘Dve lokā’’tiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphalānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ ‘‘idha loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito, tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Anurodhādivatthubhūtā lābhādayo aṭṭha lokadhammā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni vivaṭṭajjhāsayassa adhippetattā. Tassa ca sabbaṃ tebhūmakakammaṃ garahitabbaṃ, vajjitabbañca hutvā upaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjaṃ, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajja’’nti. Yesaṃ puggalānaṃ saddhādayo mandā, te idha ‘‘assaddhā’’tiādinā vuttā. Na pana sabbena sabbaṃ saddhādīnaṃ abhāvatoti apparajakkhadukādīsu pañcasu dukesu ekekasmiṃ dasa dasa katvā ‘‘paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā anvayato, byatirekato ca saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ jānātīti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca apparajakkhādivasena āvajjantassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekā.
莲花在这里存在,所以叫“有莲花”,也可以指池塘或湖泊,但这里指的是湖泊,所以说“在莲花林中”。那些在水里一直沉没着开花、生长的,就是“内沉而生长者”。已被开示的,是指在注释书中被阐明的,或者就在这里以“还有其他”等说法被开示的。略说即知者:“略说”指的是智的开启,仅仅在智被开启的那一刻就了知,这就是它的意思。广说方知者:了知详细展开之义的人。应被引导者:应通过略示等而被引导的人。仅在举示之时:就在法被略说举示的那一刻。法现观:以智对四圣谛法的现观。此被称为:这个人能依照“四念处”等略说论母正在开示的教法次第,驱动智而证得阿拉汉,就被称为“略说即知者”。此被称为:在安立略说论母之后,当义理被详细分别解说时,能证得阿拉汉的人,就被称为“广说方知者”。从略说故:以略说为因,即正在略说的人,或令人略说的人的意思。从遍问故:遍问义理的人。依次第而得法现观:渐次证得阿拉汉的人。非于彼生而得法现观:以那个自体,不能生起道、果,乃至最低的禅那或观。此人被称为以句为最上者:这个人只以文句为最上,所以被称为“句最上者”。巴利
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippetoti āha ‘‘uppalavane’’ti. Yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pusanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīnī.Dīpitānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni, idheva vā ‘‘aññānipī’’tiādinā dīpitāni. Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭanaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatte eva jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāramevamatthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre dhammassa uddese udāhaṭamatte eva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhittena mātikāya dīpiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho ‘‘puggalo ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṅkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho ‘‘puggalo vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa, uddisāpentassa vāti attho. Paripucchatoti atthaṃ paripucchantassa. Anupubbenadhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatto hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamoti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti ‘‘padaparamo’’ti vuccati.
这里说的“有些人”,是指《分别论》里针对两类人所说的内容。所谓“业障”,就是五种无间业。所谓“异熟障”,就是无因结生。因为二因结生的人也不能证悟圣道,所以二因结生也应该理解为就是“异熟障”。所谓“烦恼障”,就是决定性的邪见。所谓“无信”,就是对佛等没有信心。所谓“无欲”,就是对应该做的善法没有意愿,北俱卢洲的人就处在无欲的状态中。所谓“劣慧”,就是有分慧有欠缺。不过,即使有分慧本身圆满,如果这个人的有分不能成为出世间的缘,那他也同样叫“劣慧者”。所谓“在善法中不能进入正性决定”,就是在善法当中,不能进入、不能证得那个叫正性决定的圣道。至于“不是业障……”等说法,则应该按与上面相反的道理来理解。巴利
Yeti ye duvidhe puggale sandhāya vuttaṃ vibhaṅge kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukapaṭisandhipi ‘‘vipākāvaraṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhā rahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā, uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā, bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa paccayo na hoti, sopi duppañño eva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesusammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ okkamituṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā. ‘‘Na kammāvaraṇenā’’tiādīni vuttavipariyāyena veditabbāni.
关于“贪行者”等(类别)中应当说明的内容,在《胜义明灯》——也就是《清净道论》的注释——里(有详细阐述)。巴利
‘‘Rāgacaritā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paramatthadīpaniyaṃ [paramatthamañjūsāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyanti bhavitabbaṃ –
此即随处随宜、如实所摄诸究竟义之宝藏,
故名“究竟义宝箧”;其义当依《清净道论注》所说法门而解。巴利
‘‘Sā esā paramatthānaṃ, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ; Nidhānato paramattha-mañjūsā nāma nāmato’’ti. (visuddhimaggamahāṭīkāya nigamane sayameva vuttattā)] visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ;
70 “开始”的意思是:为了向世尊表明自己心中的意图而作的陈述。说“如于岩石山顶上”,是因为岩石山又高又坚固,不是土堆成的山,也不是土石混杂的山。“法所成的宫殿”指的是出世间法。它既像山,因为它超越一切法而高高升起;又像宫殿。在这里,“法”这个词是智慧的代称。正如《法集论注》中所说:“智慧因具有高高升起的特性,所以称为‘宫殿’。”同样地,经中也说:巴利
70.Ārabbhāti attano adhippetassa atthassa bhagavato jānāpanaṃ uddissāti attho. Selo pabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato, missakapabbato vāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhanī’’ti. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi pabbatasadiso ca hoti sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca, paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo . Sā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādoti abhidhamme (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
“ 登上智慧的高台,不再忧愁,俯视着那些被忧愁缠住的众生。
就像站在山上的人俯视站在地面上的人,智者也是这样看待愚者。”巴利
‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
“正如”等句应当这样理解:好比一个人站在山上,在漆黑的夜里往下看,田里的田埂和小屋,以及睡在那里的人,都因为不发光的缘故而看不见;但小屋里的火焰,却因为发光而看得清清楚楚。同样,世尊登上法之宫殿,俯视众生世间时,那些没有造作善业的有情,因为智慧之火没有点燃,没有光明、也不殊胜,就像黑夜里射出的箭一样,进入不了世尊智慧的视野。而那些已经造作善业、堪受教化的有情,即使站在很远的地方,也能进入世尊智慧的视野,因为他们成熟的智慧之火炽然明亮,生命相续广大殊胜,就像雪山一样醒目。应当这样理解其义理的关联。巴利
‘‘Yathā hī’’tiādīsu yathā pabbate ṭhatvā rattandhakāre heṭṭhā olokentassa purisassa khette kedārapāḷikuṭiyo, tattha sayitamanussā ca na paññāyanti anujjalabhāvato. Kuṭikāsu pana aggijālā paññāyati ujjalabhāvato evaṃ dhammapāsādamāruyha sattalokaṃ olokayato bhagavato ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti akatakalyāṇā sattā ñāṇagginā anujjalabhāvato, anuḷārabhāvato ca rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Katakalyāṇā pana bhabbapuggalā dūre ṭhitāpi bhagavato ñāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchanti paripakkañāṇaggitāya samujjalabhāvato, uḷārasantānatāya himavantapabbato viya cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
起来吧!你要从那种被称为“不活跃”的退缩状态中站起来——那是一种由于对说法感到疲厌而陷入的过失。以精进力而言,是指具备殊胜的四种正勤的精进力。因为精进是英雄的本性,或者说是英雄的行为。由于烦恼魔和死魔在未来不再生起,所以说“死烦恼魔”。这里没有单独提到征服行魔,因为征服了烦恼魔,就已经表明了行魔也被征服。就能运载而言,是指有能力把众生从轮回的大沙漠运送到名为涅槃的安稳之地。巴利
Uṭṭhehīti tvaṃ dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha. Vīriyavantatāyāti sātisaya catubbidhasammappadhānavīriyavantatāya. Vīrassa hi bhāvo, kammaṃ vā vīriyaṃ. Kilesamārassa viya maccumārassapi āyatiṃ asambhavato ‘‘maccukilesamārāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhisaṅkhāramāravijayassa aggahaṇaṃ kilesamāravijayeneva tabbijayassa jotitabhāvato. Vāhanasamatthatāyāti saṃsāramahākantārato nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemappadesaṃ sampāpanasamatthatāya.
71 有些人读作“不死之门已为他们打开”。因为世尊是以大悲为依托,凭自悟之智证得,所以把通往涅槃的门——也就是进入涅槃的道路——打开并安立下来。“让他们释放信心”,意思是让他们表明信心,呈现出自己信受的样子。由于它能安乐、无困难地运转,所以是“善运转”。他这样想:我没有说过,也不会说。巴利
71. ‘‘Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra’’nti keci paṭhanti. Nibbānassa dvāraṃ pavisanamaggo vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhuñāṇena adhigatattā. Saddhaṃ pamuñcantūti saddhaṃ pavedentu, attano saddahanākāraṃ upaṭṭhāpentūti attho. Sukhena akicchena pavattanīyatāya suppavattitaṃ. Na bhāsiṃ na bhāsissāmīti cintesi.
上首弟子一对的注释巴利
Aggasāvakayugavaṇṇanā
73 “交谈之后”:就是像“贤友,你的诸根真是清净明亮”这样的话(《大品》60),这样互相问候交谈之后。因为这次交谈,成了他后来前去亲近世尊的助缘。巴利
73.Sallapitvāti ‘‘vippasannāni kho te āvuso indriyānī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 60) ālāpasallāpaṃ katvā. Tañhissa aparabhāge satthu santikaṃ upasaṅkamanassa paccayo ahosi.
75-6 “次第论”就是按照次第、按顺序应当宣说的论。那是什么呢?就是布施论等。其中,布施论之所以最先宣说,是因为它在众人中普遍流传,是一切人共有的,容易实行,而且能作为安立于戒的方便。乐于施舍的人,对所占有的财物没有贪著,所以能轻松地受持诸戒,并在戒上稳固立足。由于戒能使施者与受者都清净,又因为说了利益他人之后接着说不损害他人,说了应作之法之后接着说不应作之法,说了财富成就之因之后接着说生命成就之因,所以在布施论之后接着宣说戒论。如果这布施和戒还系属于轮回,那么为了显示这种生命成就就是它们的果报,也为了显示:由这些以布施和戒为本、有殊胜、更殊胜等种种差别的福德事,能感得在四大王天等处有殊胜、更殊胜等种种差别、不可计量的天界受用和生命成就,紧接着就宣说生天论。说了生天之后,为了显示这个天界还被贪等烦恼所染污,而圣道则永远不被染污,所以在生天论之后应当宣说道论。宣说道时,为了让人明白证得那道的方法,应当宣说:即便属于天界之法,更何况其他一切欲乐,都有许多过患,是无常的、不持久的、会变坏的——这是欲乐的过患;它们是低劣的、庸俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、不带来利益的——这是它们卑劣的一面;一切存在都是烦恼的依处——这是其中的杂染;彻底脱离一切烦恼的,就是涅槃——这是出离的功德。这里“道”等词的意思,应当通过“iti”这个词所表达的“如此”等含义来理解。巴利
75-6.Anupubbiṃkathanti anupubbiyā anupubbaṃ kathetabbaṃ kathaṃ. Kā pana sāti? Dānādikathā. Tattha dānakathā tāva pacurajanesu pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā, sukarattā, sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathitā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā, tañce dānasīlaṃ vaṭṭanissitaṃ, ayaṃ bhavasampatti tassa phalanti dassanatthaṃ, imehi ca dānasīlamayehi paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnehi puññakiriyavatthūhi etā cātumahārājikādīsu paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnā aparimeyyā dibbabhogabhavasampattiyo hontīti dassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ saggakathaṃ. Vatvā ayaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbadā anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggakathā kathetabbā. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyadassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi, pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā, aniccā adhuvā, vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, hīnā, gammā, pothujjanikā, anariyā, anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso, sabbaso kilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti ayamattho maggantīti ettha iti-saddena ādiatthajotakena bodhitoti veditabbaṃ.
“诸乐的因”:是指现世乐、来世乐,以及与涅槃相关的乐,这一切乐的因。世间无论哪种财富之乐,全都以布施为根本因,这个道理很明显。至于与禅那、观、道、果、涅槃相关的乐,布施也确实是它们的亲依止缘。“诸成就的根本”:世间像地方王权、自在权势、七宝庄严的转轮王成就等种种人间成就,以及四大王天等种种天界成就,乃至其他一切成就,对这一切成就来说,布施就是根本,就是因。“诸受用”:指以可受用之义而得名为“受用”的可意色等,以及依这些而起的受用乐。以庇护之义来说,就是依止处。“遭遇不幸者”:指遭遇灾祸的人。“救护”:就是保护,因为能使人免于灾祸。“避难处”:是被灾祸逼迫时得以安身停留的地方。“去处”:是应当前往的地方。“归宿”:是皈依投靠之处。“依靠”:是不让人堕落、作为支撑的依止。“所缘”:是可以攀附、可以执取的所缘对象。巴利
Sukhānaṃ nidānanti diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ, samparāyikānaṃ, nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttānañcāti sabbesampi sukhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Yañhi kiñci loke bhogasukhaṃ nāma, taṃ sabbaṃ dānanidānanti pākaṭo yamattho. Yaṃ pana taṃ jhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tassāpi dānaṃ upanissayapaccayo hotiyeva. Sampattīnaṃ mūlanti yā imā loke padesarajjaṃ sirissariyaṃ sattaratanasamujjalacakkavattisampadāti evaṃpabhedā mānusikā sampattiyo, yā ca cātumahārājikacātumahārājādibhedā dibbasampattiyo, yā vā panaññāpi sampattiyo, tāsaṃ sabbāsaṃ idaṃ dānaṃ nāma mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Bhogānanti bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘bhogo’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ manāpiyarūpādīnaṃ, tannissayānañca upabhogasukhānaṃ. Avassayaṭṭhena patiṭṭhā. Visamagatassāti byasanappattassa. Tāṇanti rakkhā tato paripālanato. Leṇanti byasanehi paripāciyamānassa olīyanapadeso. Gatīti gantabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Parāyaṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Avassayoti vinipatituṃ adento nissayo. Ārammaṇanti olubbhārammaṇaṃ.
像一切宝物做成、有七支的大狮子座:它极其珍贵,却完全不会让人堕落。像大地:无论走到哪里,都能立足其上,让人得到依托。像支撑的绳子:就像虚弱的人,靠着绳子站起来、站着时都能得到支撑;同样,布施对众生来说,是获得成就、得以生起和保持的助缘。以度脱苦难为义:就是以度脱恶趣之苦为义。以使人完全安息为义:就是对贪、悭等敌对灾祸,真正让人得到安息。以防护怖畏为义:就是保护人免于贫穷的怖畏。以悭吝垢等:指悭吝、贪、嗔、妒、疑、邪见等心的污垢。以不染着义:无染污、不被染着。对于它们:对于悭吝垢等那些心的垢秽。以这些难可侵犯义:因这些(垢秽)而难以侵近、难以侵犯。以不令恐惧义:不被征服之性,无所恐惧。凡施主、布施之主,他在现世尚且不畏惧任何处,何况来世。这里是以法为首而说人。以有大力义:具大势力之特质。施主、布施之主在现世以亲友之力而有大力,来世则以身力等(而有大力)。以大吉祥所许义:以“增长之因”而被共许之义。从衰败有到成就有的引导,是到达安隐之地;从有之战斗到瑜伽安稳的引导,也是到达安隐之地之义。巴利
Ratanamayasīhāsanasadisanti sabbaratanamayasattaṅgamahāsīhāsanasadisaṃ mahagghaṃ hutvā sabbaso vinipatituṃ appadānato. Mahāpathavisadisaṃ gatagataṭṭhāne patiṭṭhāya labhāpanato. Ālambanarajjusadisanti yathā dubbalassa purisassa ālambanarajju uttiṭṭhato, tiṭṭhato ca upatthambho, evaṃ dānaṃ sattānaṃ sampattibhave uppattiyā, ṭhitiyā ca paccayabhāvato. Dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhenāti duggatidukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena. Samassāsanaṭṭhenāti lobhamacchariyādipaṭisattupaddavato sammadeva assāsanaṭṭhena. Bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhenāti dāliddiyabhayato paripālanaṭṭhena. Maccheramalādīhīti maccheralobhadosaissāvicikicchādiṭṭhi ādicittamalehi. Anupalittaṭṭhenāti anupakkiliṭṭhatāya. Tesanti maccheramalādikacavarānaṃ. Etehi eva durāsadaṭṭhena. Asantāsanaṭṭhenāti anabhibhavanīyatāya santāsābhāvena. Yo hi dāyako dānapati, so sampatipi kutoci na bhāyati, pageva āyatiṃ. Dhammasīsena puggalo vutto. Balavantaṭṭhenāti mahābalavatāya. Dāyako hi dānapati sampati pakkhabalena balavā hoti, āyatiṃ pana kāyabalādīhipi. Abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhenāti ‘‘vaḍḍhikāraṇa’’nti abhisammatabhāvena. Vipattibhavato sampattibhavūpanayanaṃ khemantabhūmisampāpanaṃ, bhavasaṅgāmato yogakkhemasampāpanañca khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭho.
现在,为了说明布施也能像那些在轮回中达到顶点的成就一样,即使是在出离轮回的层面上也能促成这些成就,并且为了通过菩提行的角度来展示布施的功德,所以说了“dānañhi”(诚然,布施……)等话。其中,帝释天神、魔罗、梵天的成就是纯粹为了自利的,而转轮王的成就则是既为了自利也为了利他的。为了说明这一点,转轮王的成就被放在后面单独说。这些是世间的成就,而接下来要说的则是出世间的,为了说明这一点,之后又说了“sāvakapāramīñāṇa”(声闻巴拉密智)等。在那里,为了说明殊胜、更殊胜、最殊胜的层次差别,依次说了三种智慧。而它们以布施为助缘的道理,前面已经说过了。应当知道,正是通过这一点,也说明了布施是梵天成就的助缘。巴利
Idāni dānaṃ vaṭṭagatā ukkaṃsappattā sampattiyo viya vivaṭṭagatāpi tā sampādetīti bodhicariyabhāvenapi dānaguṇe dassetuṃ ‘‘dānañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sakkamārabrahmasampattiyo attahitāya eva, cakkavattisampatti pana attahitāya, parahitāya cāti dassetuṃ sā tāsaṃ parato vuttā, etā lokiyā, imā pana lokuttarāti dassetuṃ tato paraṃ ‘‘sāvakapāramīñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhatarukkaṭṭhatamāti dassetuṃ kamena ñāṇattayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ pana dānassa paccayabhāvo heṭṭhā vutto eva. Etenevassa brahmasampattiyāpi paccayabhāvo dīpitoti veditabbo.
布施,是指以想利益应受供养者的心,或以恭敬应受供养者的心,把自己的财物施舍给他人。因此,施主就是对众生一心怀着利益之心的人。这样的人不可能“伤害众生,或夺取他人的财物”,所以说“正在布施的人,能够受持戒律”。没有任何装饰品能比得上戒,因为戒不是人为造作的,而且任何时候都能带来殊胜的光彩。也没有任何花能比得上戒花,这里的道理也是一样。没有任何香气能比得上戒香,这里应当引用“旃檀香、多伽罗香……”等偈颂(《法句》55),以及“持戒已久的仙人们的戒香,随着风飘散,即使身体毁坏也依然流传……”等经文(《本生》2.17.55)。戒对于众生来说,既是饰品,也是庄严,是香和涂香,还能让人容貌变得令人欢喜。因此注释中说“以戒庄严……”等等。巴利
Dānañca nāma dakkhiṇeyyesu hitajjhāsayena vā pūjanajjhāsayena vā attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanaṃ, tasmā dāyako sattesu ekantahitajjhāsayo purisapuggalo, so ‘‘paresaṃ hiṃsati, paresaṃ vā santakaṃ haratī’’ti aṭṭhānametanti āha ‘‘dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkotī’’ti. Sīlasadiso alaṅkāro natthīti akittimaṃ hutvā sabbakālaṃ sobhāvisesāvahattā. Sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthīti ettha ‘‘candanaṃ tagaraṃ vāpī’’tiādikā (dha. pa. 55) gāthā, ‘‘gandho isīnaṃ ciradikkhitānaṃ, kāyā cuto gacchati mālutenā’’tiādikā (jā. 2.17.55) ca vattabbā . Sīlañhi sattānaṃ ābharaṇañceva alaṅkāro ca gandhavilepanañca parassa dassanīyabhāvāvahañca. Tenāha ‘‘sīlālaṅkārena hī’’tiādi.
“得此天界”这句话,是针对以中等的意欲等所发起的戒而说的。因此天王帝释这样说过:巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ saggo labbhatī’’ti idaṃ majjhimehi chandādīhi āraddhaṃ sīlaṃ sandhāyāha. Tenāha sakko devarājā –
“ 以低劣的梵行,投生在刹帝利族中;
以中等的生到天界,以最上的得到净化。”巴利
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.429);
“可爱”是指快乐,“可意”是指令人喜爱,“悦意”是指令心增长。为了显示它这种可爱等的状态,接着说了“常在这里游戏”等话。“常”是指一切时候;“游戏”是指与欲相应的快乐安住。“成就”是指财富的成就。“天的”是指属于天界的生存状态。“乐”是指身体的乐和心的乐。“天成就”是指天界的生存状态、寿命的成就、容貌名声自在的成就,以及色身等方面的成就。“如是等”中的“等”字,是指由夜摩天等天人所受用的种种天界成就。巴利
Iṭṭhoti sukho, kantoti kamanīyo, manāpoti manavaḍḍhanako, taṃ panassa iṭṭhādibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘niccamettha kīḷā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Niccanti sabbakālaṃ kīḷāti kāmūpasaṃhitā sukhavihārā. Sampattiyoti bhogasampattiyo. Dibbanti dibbabhavaṃ devalokapariyāpannaṃ. Sukhanti kāyikaṃ, cetasikañca sukhaṃ. Dibbasampattinti dibbabhavaṃ āyusampattiṃ, vaṇṇayasaissariyasampattiṃ, rūpādisampattiñca. Evamādīti ādi-saddena yāmādīhi anubhavitabbaṃ dibbasampattiṃ vadati.
“少味”是指没有滋味,因为对如实观察的智者来说,其中根本没有可贪著之味。“多苦”是指现在就已是大苦,而且未来还会连着广大的苦。“多灾患”是指有种种危险。“于此”是指在诸欲中。“格外”是指很多。“过失”是指由无常等、少味等而成为染污,因此它们不能让智者的心感到满意。或者,“过患”是指作为可悲之事而转起,也就是极度可悲;当人们如实观察诸欲时,诸欲就呈现出这种样子。“鄙劣”是指低劣,因为这是下劣之人所亲近的,而不是最上之人所应亲近的。“会染污”是指会逼迫、会恼害。关于“出离的利益”:在这里,诸欲有多少过患,与它相对,出离就有多少利益。此外,还以“所谓出离,就是无逼迫、无染污,脱离诸欲,脱离欲想,脱离欲寻,脱离欲热恼,脱离嗔害”等这样的方式,说明了出离的利益,并阐明、赞叹了出家以及禅定等功德。巴利
Appassādāti nirassādā paṇḍitehi yathābhūtaṃ passantehi tattha assādetabbatābhāvato. Bahudukkhāti mahādukkhā sampati, āyatiñca vipuladukkhānubandhattā. Bahupāyāsāti anekavidhaparissayā. Etthāti kāmesu. Bhiyyoti bahuṃ. Dosoti aniccatādinā, appassādatādinā ca dūsitabhāvo, yato te viññūnaṃ cittaṃ nārādhenti. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, paramakapaṇatā, tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti. Lāmakabhāvoti nihīnabhāvo aseṭṭhehi sevitabbattā, seṭṭhehi na sevitabbattā ca. Saṃkilissananti vibādhetabbatā upatāpetabbatā. Nekkhamme ānisaṃsanti ettha yattakā kāmesu ādīnavā, tappaṭipakkhato tattakā nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Api ca ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpādato’’tiādinā (sārattha. ṭī. 3.26 mahāvagge) nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃse pakāsesi, pabbajjāya, jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi.
这里说的“依前所说之义”,是指前面没有解释过的“堪任之心”等词。其中,“堪任之心”就是适合做事的心。因为在前一段开示里说过的不信等心的毛病已经去掉了,心就能成为领受后面开示的合格容器,所以叫适合做事的心。其实,不信等本来就是心的病,那时这些病已经没有了,所以也可以说是没有病的心。因为离开了邪见、我慢等烦恼,所以是柔软的心。因为离开了爱欲等,所以是没有障碍的心。因为在正确的修行中与广大的喜与悦相应,所以是振奋的心。在这种状态里,因为具足了信,所以是清净信解的心。应当这样连接:当世尊了知。另外也可以这样理解:叫“堪任之心”,是因为远离爱欲,所以是没有病的心;叫“柔软之心”,是因为远离嗔恚,以慈爱而住,所以不再僵硬;叫“无障碍之心”,是因为远离掉举和追悔,散乱已经消除,所以心不被遮盖;叫“振奋之心”,是因为远离昏沉和睡眠,以策励而住,所以不萎靡;叫“清净信解之心”,是因为远离疑惑,对正确的修行生起信解。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Vuttanayanti ettha yaṃ avuttanayaṃ ‘‘kallacitte’’tiādi, tattha kallacitteti kammaniyacitte, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacitteti attho. Assaddhiyādayo hi yasmā cittassa rogabhūtā tadā te vigatā, tasmā arogacitteti attho. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamanena muducitte. Kāmacchandādivigamena vinīvaraṇacitte. Sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogena udaggacitte. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacitte. Yadā ca bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vā kallacitteti kāmacchandavigamena arogacitte. Muducitteti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akathinacitte. Vinīvaraṇacitteti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacitte. Udaggacitteti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahitavasena alīnacitte. Pasannacitteti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacitte, evampettha attho veditabbo.
“犹如……”等语,是通过譬喻来说明他们舍断杂染以及圣道生起的情况。“Apagatakāḷakaṃ”就是去除了黑色斑点。“Sammadevā”就是好好地、完全地。“Rajanaṃ”指染料,即蓝、黄等颜色。“Paṭiggaṇheyyā”就是能接受、能取得,变得光亮明净。“在那同一个座位上”就是在同一处坐的地方,以此显示他们容易修观、智慧锐利、修行安乐且能迅速通达。“Virajaṃ”(离尘),因为去除了能导向恶趣的贪欲等尘垢,所以叫离尘。因为完全去除了邪见和疑的污垢,所以叫“Vītamalaṃ”(离垢)。也可以说,因为没有初道所断的烦恼尘垢,所以是离尘;因为舍离了五种犯戒的污垢,所以是离垢。关于“Dhammacakkhuṃ”(法眼),在《布拉玛优寿经》中说的是下面三道,在《小罗睺罗教诫经》中说的是漏尽,而在这里指的是入流道。经文说“凡是集起之法,那一切都息灭之法”,这是在开示它生起的行相。有人问:道智不是以无为法为所缘,而不是以有为法为所缘吗?确实如此。但是,因为道智是以涅槃为所缘,依其作用而通达一切有为法,所以才那样说。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpī’’tiādinā upamāvasena nesaṃ saṃkilesappahānaṃ, ariyamagguppādañca dasseti. Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ. Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva. Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ. Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya. Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tissameva nisajjāyaṃ, etena nesaṃ lahuvipassakatā, tikkhapaññatā, sukhapaṭipadākhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti. Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ. Anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamanena vītamalaṃ. Paṭhamamaggavajjhakilesarajābhāvena vā virajaṃ. Pañcavidhadussīlyamalāpagamanena vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383) heṭṭhimā tayo maggā vuttā, cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416) āsavakkhayo, idha pana sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti tassa uppattiākāradassananti. Nanu ca maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti? Saccametaṃ. Yasmā taṃ nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena sabbasaṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tathā vuttaṃ.
在“清净的布”这个譬喻里,对应关系是这样的:布好比心;布被后来沾上的污垢弄脏,好比心被贪等烦恼染污;洗衣石好比次第说法;水好比信;把布浸在水里,用碱和牛粪灰去掉那些黑斑来洗布,就好比先用信的润泽反复浸湿,再靠念、定、慧让烦恼松动,然后通过听闻等修行来净化心的精勤努力;靠这个过程去掉布上各种黑斑,就好比靠精勤努力暂时压伏烦恼;染料好比圣道;用染料把洗净的布染得鲜亮明净,就好比以圣道把已压伏烦恼的心彻底净化。
说了“见法”之后,因为“见”除了智见之外还有别的含义,为了排除那些,所以说“得法”。“得”除了智的成就之外也还有别的含义,为了显示差别,所以说“知法”。不过“知法”也可能只是知道法的一部分,为了表明是无余了知,所以说“入法”,以此说明他们就是现观四圣谛。因为道智以一次现观就完成遍知等功能,毫无遗漏地全面深入并通达四谛法。其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
‘‘Suddhaṃ vattha’’nti nidassitaupamāyaṃ idaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo , dhovanasilā viya anupubbikathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udake temetvā ūsagomayachārikābharehi kāḷakapadese samucchinditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithilī katvā sutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho, tena payogena vatthe nānākāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammā’’ti vatvā dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññampi vijjatīti tato visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana viditadhammatā dhammesu ekadesenāpi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ, tena nesaṃ saccābhisambodhiṃyeva vibhāveti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesatova catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāhantaṃ paṭivijjhatīti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
77 “衣等施”这句话,是针对布施衣等资具而说的。如果有人把八种资具,或者只把钵和衣,布施给入流者等圣者,或者布施给具足戒行的凡夫,然后发愿说“愿这份资具布施成为我未来获得善来比丘身份的助缘”,应当知道:当他所积累的福德因缘成熟时,就会在诸佛面前获得神通所化的资具。就像那些具足威仪的百岁长老一样——这就是这段话的意趣所在。巴利
77.Cīvaradānādīnīti cīvarādiparikkhāradānaṃ sandhāyāha. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre, pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa, puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, tassa ca sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ. Vassasatikattherā viya ākappasampannāti adhippāyo.
“开示”的意思是:清楚地呈现在眼前而显示。“此世的利益”是指属于此世、被称为五蕴的意义。“他世的利益”在这里也是同样的道理。“显示”是从共相和自相两方面来显示。因此说“无常”等。其中,因为存在之后又消失,所以显示为无常;因为被生灭逼迫,所以显示为苦;因为不能自主控制,所以显示为无我。这些具有变坏等特征的五蕴,是从堆积的意义上显示为蕴。这些具有眼等本质的十八界,是从没有众生、没有命者的意义上显示。这些具有眼等本质、作为门和所缘的十二处,是这样显示。这些以无明等开始、以老死结束的十二种缘法,就是缘起,是这样显示。对于色蕴,按照前面所说的方式,从缘的角度有四种,从刹那的角度有一种,这些就是所显示的五种相。“如是”这个词,是把“五种相”这个说法收摄进来。“显示”中的“iti”一词是表示举例的意思,就是“如此”的意思。地狱:显示了一切地狱,包括八大地狱和十六小地狱等不同种类。畜生道:显示了无足、二足、四足、多足等不同种类,以及走兽、牲畜、飞禽、爬虫等各种各样畜生世界。饿鬼界:显示了受饥饿口渴之苦的、食呕吐物的、依靠他人施舍活命的、被焦渴折磨的等各种不同种类的饿鬼众生世界。阿修罗众:就是黑阿修罗众。这样先说了属于恶趣的他世利益,现在要说属于善趣的他世利益,所以说“三种善业的异熟”等。将广果天摄入遍净天之中,因为无想天和无色界中没有可显示的圆满,难以了知,所以只说“九种梵天世界”。巴利
Sandassesīti suṭṭhu paccakkhaṃ katvā dassesi. Idhalokatthanti idhalokabhūtaṃ khandhapañcakasaṅkhātamatthaṃ. Paralokatthanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dassesīti sāmaññalakkhaṇato, salakkhaṇato ca dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘anicca’’ntiādi. Tattha hutvā abhāvato aniccanti dassesi. Udayabbayapaṭipīḷanato dukkhanti dassesi. Avasavattanato anattāti dassesi. Ime ruppanādilakkhaṇā pañcakkhandhāti rāsaṭṭhena khandhe dassesi. Ime cakkhādisabhāvā nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena aṭṭhārasa dhātuyoti dassesi. Imāni cakkhādisabhāvāneva dvārārammaṇabhūtāni dvādasa āyatanānīti dassesi. Ime avijjādayo jarāmaraṇapariyosānā dvādasa paccayadhammā paṭiccasamuppādoti dassesi. Rūpakkhandhassa heṭṭhā vuttanayena paccayato cattāri, khaṇato ekanti imāni pañca lakkhaṇāni dassesi. Tathāti iminā ‘‘pañca lakkhaṇānī’’ti padaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Dassentoti iti-saddo nidassanattho, evanti attho. Nirayanti aṭṭhamahānirayasoḷasaussadanirayappabhedaṃ sabbaso nirayaṃ dassesi. Tiracchānayoninti apadadvipadacatuppadabahuppadādibhedaṃ migapasupakkhisarīsapādivibhāgaṃ nānāvidhaṃ tiracchānalokaṃ. Pettivisayanti khuppipāsikavantāsikaparadattūpajīvinijjhāmataṇhikādibhedabhinnaṃ nānāvidhaṃ petasattalokaṃ. Asurakāyanti kālakañcikāsuranikāyaṃ. Evaṃ tāva duggatibhūtaṃ paralokatthaṃ vatvā idāni sugatibhūtaṃ vattuṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ kusalānaṃ vipāka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vehapphale subhakiṇṇeyeva saṅgahetvā asaññīsu, arūpīsu ca sampattiyā dassetabbāya abhāvato duviññeyyatāya ‘‘navannaṃ brahmalokāna’’ntveva vuttaṃ.
令他们执取,就是让他们接受那些法并且照着去做。巴利
Gaṇhāpesīti te dhamme samādinne kārāpesi.
所谓“策励”,是指对已经受持佛法的人,让他们生起这样的劲头:就像没有帮助的法会退失、被舍弃,有帮助的法则会增长、变得清净。为了说明这种策励是怎样产生的,才说了“此世与彼世的利益……”等话。“一再令其悚惧”,是通过让他们反复生起警觉,从而一再激励他们。“如同已经证得一样”,是对他所说法的那些人,让这个义理好像当下正在被他们亲自体验一样。因为对堪受教化的人来说,诸佛所开示的义理,甚至比亲自证得还要更清楚、更明显地呈现出来。正因如此,世尊才被这样称赞:巴利
Samuttejanaṃ nāma samādinnadhammānaṃ yathā anupakārakā dhammā parihāyanti, pahīyanti ca, upakārakā dhammā parivaḍḍhanti, visujjhanti ca, tathā nesaṃ ussāhuppādananti āha ‘‘abbhussāhesī’’ti. Yathā pana taṃ ussāhuppādanaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idhalokatthañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāsetvā tāsetvāti paribyattabhāvāpādanena tejetvā tejetvā. Adhigataṃ viya katvāti yesaṃ katheti, tehi tamatthaṃ paccakkhato anubhuyyamānaṃ viya katvā. Veneyyānañhi buddhehi pakāsiyamāno attho paccakkhatopi pākaṭataro hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tathā hi bhagavā evaṃ thomīyati –
“ 这个世间也被十一种火燃烧着,
被愚痴蒙蔽的人,不会这样生起悚惧。
听了大仙所说与过患相应的话语。
诸佛的言教,就算比起亲身体证来,也是极其明白清楚的。”巴利
‘‘Ādittopi ayaṃ loko, ekādasahi aggibhi; Na tathā yāti saṃvegaṃ, sammohapaliguṇṭhito. Sutvādīnavasaññuttaṃ, yathā vācaṃ mahesino; Paccakkhatopi buddhānaṃ, vacanaṃ suṭṭhu pākaṭa’’nti.
因此他说“三十二种刑罚和二十五种大恐怖无差别”等等。三十二种刑罚,应该按照《苦蕴经》里“他们砍手……”等所说的方式来理解。二十五种大恐怖,应该按照各处经典里“生的恐怖、老的恐怖、病的恐怖、死的恐怖”等所说的方式来理解。杀戮刑具,就是用来反复殴打的粗棍,也被称为“极刑”。巴利
Tenāha ‘‘dvattiṃsakammakāraṇapañcavīsatimahābhayappabhedañhī’’tiādi. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇāni ‘‘hatthampi chindantī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.178) dukkhakkhandhasutte āgatanayena veditabbāni. Pañcavīsatimahābhayāni ‘‘jātibhayaṃ jarābhayaṃ byādhibhayaṃ maraṇabhaya’’ntiādinā (cūḷani. 123) tattha tattha sutte āgatanayena veditabbāni. Āghātanabhaṇḍikā adhikuṭṭanakaḷiṅgaraṃ, yaṃ ‘‘accādhāna’’ntipi vuccati.
他通过现前可见的事实来说明:“由于证得种种功德,这也是你们所获得的,这也是利益。”他这样说,就像在质问:“在此之前,有过这样的情形吗?”因此说:“他把它说成具有大利益而宣说。”巴利
Paṭiladdhaguṇena codesīti ‘‘taṃtaṃguṇādhigamena ayampi tumhehi paṭiladdho, ānisaṃso ayampī’’ti paccakkhato dassento ‘‘kiṃ ito pubbe evarūpaṃ atthī’’ti codento viya ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘mahānisaṃsaṃ katvā kathesī’’ti.
以那些行为流转为因,在各各有情的身心相续中生起的疲惫、逼恼和伤害,就是“以彼为缘的疲劳”。“此处”指的是前面为了证得初道而说的教法。因为一切行为造作彻底止息,所以是“寂静”。因为是最上乐、令人永不厌足,所以是“殊胜”。因为能从整个轮回的灾患中予以保护,从保护的意义上说是“救护”。对于因此心生厌离的人,它是可以藏身的地方,所以叫“洞窟”。用“等”这个字,把“归趣、皈依、最上安稳”这一类都包括进来了。巴利
Tappaccayañca kilamathanti saṅkhārapavattihetukaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattasantāne uppajjanakaparissamaṃ saṃvighātaṃ vihesaṃ. Idhāti heṭṭhā paṭhamamaggādhigamatthāya kathāya. Sabbasaṅkhārūpasamabhāvato santaṃ. Atittikaraparamasukhatāya paṇītaṃ. Sakalasaṃsārabyasanato tāyanatthena tāṇaṃ. Tato nibbindahadayānaṃ nilīyanaṭṭhānatāya leṇaṃ. Ādi-saddena gatipaṭisaraṇaṃ paramassāsoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
大众出家的注释巴利
Mahājanakāyapabbajjāvaṇṇanā
80 因为缺少足以构成僧团的比丘,所以才说“僧团不圆满”。因为当时确实只有两位上首弟子。巴利
80. Saṅghappahonakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvā ‘‘saṅghassa aparipuṇṇattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dve aggasāvakā eva hi tadā ahesuṃ.
允许外出游行的注释巴利
Cārikāanujānanavaṇṇanā
86 “这是从什么时候开始出现的?”对于这个问题,先用“从正觉时起……”等话简要回答之后,为了再详细说明,才说了“据说世尊……”等话。把“从正觉时起”和“七年七月七日”连起来理解,意思是:从正觉时起,他为了照顾父亲而住在那里,一共七年七月七日;而这也是因为当时没有可度化的人。他让人用粗麻布把外面遮起来,用布料把里面挡住,又在上面用布料覆盖,并在下面安置了金……华盖。“在香中间”:在盛满香料的罐子中间。“诸花”:装满罐子的水生花,以及遍布庭院等处的陆生花。“花丛树”:指用花鬘缠绕成小牛形状的装束。巴利
86. ‘‘Kadā udapādī’’ti pucchaṃ ‘‘sambodhito’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vissajjetvā puna taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pitu saṅgahaṃ karonto vihāsi sambodhito ‘‘satta saṃvaccharāni satta māse satta divase’’ti ānetvā sambandho, tañca kho veneyyānaṃ tadā abhāvato. Kilañjehi bahi chādāpetvā, vatthehi anto paṭicchādāpetvā, upari ca vatthehi chādāpetvā, tassa heṭṭhā suvaṇṇa…pe… vitānaṃ kārāpetvā. Mālāvacchaketi pupphamālāhi vacchākārena veṭhite. Gandhantareti cāṭibharitagandhassa antare. Pupphānīti cāṭiādibharitāni jalajapupphāni ceva caṅkotakādibharitāni thalajapupphāni ca.
虽然这位国王是佛陀的父亲,但佛陀是世间所尊崇的,不应受任何人控制,反而是佛陀让其他人随顺于自己的教化。所以国王说:“我不把比丘僧团交出去。”巴利
Kāmañcāyaṃ rājā buddhapitā, tathāpi buddhā nāma lokagaruno, na te kenaci vase vattetabbā, atha kho te eva pare attano vase vattenti, tasmā rājā ‘‘nāhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ demī’’ti āha.
布施之门,就是行布施的方法,意思是布施的做法。现在我的布施还没有被允许,意思是:现在我的布施没有得到允许,并不是他们不允许。巴利
Dānamukhanti dānakaraṇūpāyaṃ, dānavattanti attho. Na dāni me anuññātāti idāni me dānaṃ na anuññātā, no na anujānantīti attho.
“战栗的生活”就是痛苦地生活、贫穷度日,意思就是这样。巴利
Paritassanajīvitanti dukkhajīvikā dāliddiyanti attho.
世尊能够按份分给六百八十万比丘,所以说“能供给一切比丘”,并不是因为能遍知一切比丘而供给。因此说“将军也施与了自己的应施之物”。“于正妃位”指正宫王妃之位。巴利
Sabbesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pahosīti bhagavato aṭṭhasaṭṭhi ca bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ bhāgato dātuṃ pahosi, na sabbesaṃ pariyattabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘senāpatipi attano deyyadhammaṃ adāsī’’ti. Jeṭṭhikaṭṭhāneti jeṭṭhikadeviṭṭhāne.
像那样做了之后,就是安插了探子。清净,就是纯净。殊胜,就是广大、精妙,这里用的是中性词,就像“在一旁”等说法里那样。破碎之后,就是压碎、挤压的意思。唯用净酥乳等,就是只用内部所含的净酥乳等,也就是只用从自己的牛等身上取得的酥等。巴利
Tathevakatvāti carapurise ṭhapetvā. Sucinti suddhaṃ. Paṇītanti uḷāraṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ ‘‘ekamanta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 2) viya. Bhañjitvāti madditvā, pīḷetvāti attho. Jātisappikhīrādīhiyevāti antojātasappikhīrādīhiyeva, amhākameva gāviādito gahitasappiādīhiyevāti attho.
90 能忍受别人的毁谤、别人的伤害,以及冷热等各种情况,还有功德上的过失,能忍、能承受、能安住,这就叫忍。而这种忍,因为它能特别地烧灼、煎迫、摧毁与戒等相反的诸法,所以是最上、最殊胜的苦行。因此说:“安忍名为最上苦行。”说“安忍”,是为了把它和法随忍区分开来。忍受、忍耐就是堪忍。因为文字学家把“堪忍”这个词解释为忍的同义词,所以说“就是忍的同义词”等等。“以一切行相”,是指寂静、殊胜、微妙、吉祥、安稳等一切方式。“他不名为出家者”,是因为应当出离的法并没有被出离。这也是第三句的同义语,意义没有差别。巴利
90. Parāpavādaṃ, parāpakāraṃ, sītuṇhādibhedañca guṇāparādhaṃ khamati sahati adhivāsetīti khanti. Sā pana yasmā sīlādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhamme savisesaṃ tapati santapati vidhamatīti paramaṃ uttamaṃ tapo. Tenāha ‘‘adhivāsanakhanti nāma paramaṃ tapo’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsanakhantī’’ti iminā dhammanijjhānakkhantito viseseti. Titikkhanaṃ khamanaṃ titikkhā.Akkharacintakā hi khamāyaṃ titikkhā-saddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Tenevāha ‘‘khantiyā eva vevacana’’ntiādi. Sabbākārenāti santapaṇītanipuṇasivakhemādinā sabbappakārena. So pabbajito nāma na hoti pabbājitabbadhammassa apabbājanato. Tasseva tatiyapadassa vevacanaṃ anatthantarattā.
用“确实不……”等话,是在开显这个意思。以最上的含义称为“胜”,因为“para”这个词有最胜的意思,就像“知补特伽罗胜劣者”等处那样。“para”是“其他”的意思。现在取“para”这个词“其他”的同义词来显示含义,所以说了“或者”等话。“垢秽”就是罪恶的垢秽。“未出离”就是未拔出、未舍弃。“已寂灭”就是那些恶法已寂灭,因为说过:“恶法已寂灭,所以称为沙门。”巴利
‘‘Na hī’’tiādinā taṃ evatthaṃ vivarati. Uttamatthena paramanti vuccati para-saddassa seṭṭhavācakattā, ‘‘puggalaparoparaññū’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.68; netti. 118) viya. Paranti aññaṃ. Idāni para-saddaṃ aññapariyāyameva gahetvā atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Malassāti pāpamalassa. Apabbājitattāti anīhaṭattā anirākatattā . Samitattāti nirodhitattā tesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ samaṇoti pavuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
另外,世尊为比丘们诵说巴帝摩卡时,因为巴帝摩卡的教说以戒为核心,而戒的过失主要在于与戒相违的方面,为了说明调伏这些相违之处的办法,世尊一开始就说“忍是最高的苦行”。这是用“忍”来说明对治不可意之事的办法;而用“堪忍”一词,则说明对治可意之事的办法。通过这两者,显示了他能够战胜所生起的喜乐而安住。这就是这里要表达的意思。诸佛说,由于渴爱之林已被止息,涅槃是最高的。其中,用“忍”说明加行方面没有过失,用“堪忍”说明意乐方面没有过失。同样,用“忍”说明能忍受他人的过失,用“堪忍”说明对他人不造过失。这样从正面的因由展示了巴帝摩卡之后,现在要从反面来展示它,所以说了“确实不……”等话。由此说明:就像杀害有情的生命、用土块木杖等加以伤害,这被称为“伤害他人、恼害他人”;同样,偷盗他人根本所有的财物、侵犯他人妻女、说谎欺骗、离间彼此、用粗恶语刺伤人心、说无意义的闲话、贪求他人的财物、起断灭之见、执持邪见,这些也都是伤害和恼害。因此,任何人只要造作任何不善的业道和业行,他就不是真正的出家人,也不是真正的沙门。巴利
Apica bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisanto pātimokkhakathāya ca sīlapadhānattā sīlassa ca visesato doso paṭipakkhoti tassa niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ādito ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo’’ti āha, tena aniṭṭhassa paṭihananūpāyo vutto, titikkhāgahaṇena pana iṭṭhassa, tadubhayenapi uppannaṃ ratiṃ abhibhuyya viharatīti ayamattho dassitoti. Taṇhāvānassa vūpasamanato nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā. Tattha khantiggahaṇena payogavipattiyā abhāvo dassito, titikkhāgahaṇena āsayavipattiyā abhāvo. Tathā khantiggahaṇena parāparādhasahatā, titikkhāgahaṇena paresu anaparajjhanā dassitā. Evaṃ kāraṇamukhena anvayato pātimokkhaṃ dassetvā idāni byatirekato taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tena yathā sattānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ, pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi vibādhanañca ‘‘parūpaghāto, paraviheṭhana’’nti vuccati, evaṃ tesaṃ mūlasāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ, dāraparāmasanaṃ, visaṃvādanaṃ, aññamaññabhedanaṃ, pharusavacanena mammaghaṭṭanaṃ, niratthakavippalāpo , parasantakagijjhanaṃ, ucchedavindanaṃ, micchābhinivesanañcaupaghāto, viheṭhanañca hotīti yassa kassaci akusalassa kammapathassa, kammassa ca karaṇena pabbajito, samaṇo ca na hotīti dasseti.
“一切不善”是指属于全部十二种不善心生起、具有过失的法。“造作”就是指在自己相续中让这些不善生起;因此,从遮止它来说,就称为“不造作”,也就是“不让它生起”。这里说“善”,是因为接下来要讲“这是诸佛的教法”,所以指的是圣道法,以及作为其资粮的三地善法。由于“善”有令觉悟、令通达的意思,所以说“四地善”。“具足”就是令其具足,也就是证得它,因此说“获得”。“令心照耀”就是使心光明、彻底清净。因为证得最高道者的心才称为彻底清净,而在最高果的刹那则是已清净,由于不再需要再次清净,因此针对清净已达究竟,说“那是由阿拉汉道而成”。其意是:舍弃一切恶,是依彼分断等方式而言。因为由“戒防护”一语,即使对三地法的摄受,也摄受了其他断除,这样作以后,一切摄受就得以成立。由止观是指由世间与出世间的止观。令成办是指令完成。这里应知,令成办也是指以作为因的诸法令作为果的俱生法成办,更何况先前已成就的诸法。巴利
Sabbākusalassāti sabbassāpi dvādasākusalacittuppādasaṅgahitassa sāvajjadhammassa. Karaṇaṃ nāma tassa attano santāne uppādananti tappaṭikkhepato akaraṇaṃ ‘‘anuppādana’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kusalassā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti vakkhamānattā ariyamaggadhamme, tesañca sambhārabhūte tebhūmakakusaladhamme sambodhetīti āha ‘‘catubhūmakakusalassā’’ti. Upasampadāti upasampādanaṃ, taṃ pana tassa samadhigamoti āha ‘‘paṭilābho’’ti. Cittajotananti cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ sabbaso parisodhanaṃ. Yasmā aggamaggasamaṅgino cittaṃ sabbaso pariyodapīyati nāma, aggaphalakkhaṇe pana pariyodapitaṃ hoti puna pariyodapetabbatāya abhāvato, iti pariniṭṭhitapariyodapanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti. Sabbapāpaṃ pahāya tadaṅgādivasenevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Sīlasaṃvarenā’’ti hi iminā tebhūmakassāpi saṅgahe itarappahānānampi saṅgaho hotīti, evañca katvā sabbaggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti . Samathavipassanāhīti lokiyalokuttarāhi samathavipassanāhi. Sampādetvāti nipphādetvā. Sampādanañcettha hetubhūtāhi phalabhūtassa sahajātāhipi, pageva purimasiddhāhīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“对任何人”:这是指对低劣等任何众生、对任何责骂;因此,即使只是出于开玩笑或想逗乐的心,也禁止责骂。“不造伤害”:这里也要把“对任何人”带进来一起理解。说“以身”,这只是举例而已;因为即使只是以心,对别人起无益的想法等,也属于造成伤害,所以也应当避免。或者说,这里的“以身”也应当包括无色身,而不只是指能举手投足的身体和业所生的身体。“巴帝摩卡”:因为它在戒中特别殊胜、最为首要,所以叫巴帝摩卡。所谓“最极解脱”,只是用不同的前缀来说同一个词。这样从词形分别解释之后,再从真实义上说为“最上戒”。通过“护”等说法来说明:由于守护、保护,由于极其解脱、极其释放,所以是“巴帝摩卡”——因为它能从恶中极大地解脱出来,所以是“极解脱”,这是以因作为作者而应作假借用法。或者:任何人护持这巴帝摩卡防护戒,受持之后不违犯地守护,他就被称为“护者”;那安住在巴帝摩卡防护戒中、被称为“护者”的人,(戒)令他解脱,所以是“巴帝摩卡”。这里是简略的意思。若要详细解释,巴帝摩卡这个词的含义,应按照《清净道论》注释中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Kassacīti hīnādīsu kassaci sattassa kassaci upavādassa, tena davakamyatāyapi upavadanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Upaghātassa akaraṇanti etthāpi ‘‘kassacī’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Kāyenāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ manasāpi paresaṃ anatthacintanādivasena upaghātakaraṇassa vajjetabbattā. Kāyenāti vā ettha arūpakāyassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na copanakāyakarajakāyānameva. Pa atimokkhanti pakārato ativiya sīlesu mukhyabhūtaṃ. ‘‘Atipamokkha’’nti tameva padaṃ upasaggabyattayena vadati. Evaṃ bhedato padavaṇṇanaṃ katvā tatvato vadati ‘‘uttamasīla’’nti. ‘‘Pāti vā’’tiādinā pālanato rakkhaṇato ativiya mokkhanato ativiya mocanato pātimokkhanti dasseti. ‘‘Pāpā ati mokkhetīti atimokkho’’ti nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaritabbato. Yo vā nanti yo vā puggalo naṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pāti samādiyitvā avikopento rakkhati, taṃ ‘‘pātī’’ti laddhanāmaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle ṭhitaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkhanti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana pātimokkhapadassa attho visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.14) vuttanayena veditabbo.
“知量”是指在饮食上知量。不过,这应当特别从依止资具的戒的角度来理解,所以说“依受持与受用来知量”。如果从活命遍净戒的角度来理解,也应当说“依寻求与施舍来知量”。“远离人群杂沓”就是远离与人群的聚集,意思是避开人烟、没有喧闹的僻静处。这里显示了四资具知足,因为资具知足与其余两者共通,通过特相理趣的方式也把其余两者显示出来了。“为得八等至自在”:这是通过说明目的,指出受用僻静坐卧处是为了什么——也就是所说的增上心随行。这里所说的八等至,是指作为观之前行的等至,不是随随便便任何一种,因此应当知道,这也显示了全部增上心随行。巴利
Mattaññutāti bhojane mattaññutā, sā pana visesato paccayasannissitasīlavasena gahetabbāti āha ‘‘paṭiggahaṇaparibhogavasena pamāṇaññutā’’ti. Ājīvapārisuddhisīlavasenāpi gayhamāne ‘‘pariyesanavissajjanavasenā’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Saṅghaṭṭanavirahitanti janasaṅghaṭṭanavirahitaṃ, nirajanasambādhaṃ vivittanti attho. Catupaccayasantoso dīpito paccayasantosatāsāmaññena itaradvayassāpi lakkhaṇahāranayena jotitabhāvato. ‘‘Aṭṭhasamāpattivasibhāvāyā’’ti iminā payojanadassanavasena yadatthaṃ vivittasenāsanasevanaṃ icchitaṃ, so adhicittānuyogo vutto. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cettha vipassanāya pādakabhūtā adhippetā, na yā kācīti sakalassāpi adhicittānuyogassa jotitabhāvo veditabbo.
《天神告知注》巴利
Devatārocanavaṇṇanā
91 “到此为止”是就这些经文语句来说的。在那里,也是通过这样的……讲述,说明了善通达的状态,应当这样连接。ca这个字表示简别的意思,用它把现在要说的内容排除掉。“Ekamidaṃ”就是“一,我”。idaṃ这个字只是个不变词。用ādi这个词涵盖了“诸比丘,时”等文句。这里的词语连接是:“我,诸比丘,一时”。巴利
91.Ettāvatāti ettakena suttapadesena. Tatthāpi ca iminā…pe… kathanena suppaṭividdhabhāvaṃ pakāsetvāti yojanā. Ca-saddo byatirekattho, tena idāni vuccamānatthaṃ ullaṅgeti. Ekamidāhanti ekaṃ ahaṃ. Idaṃ-saddo nipātamattaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘bhikkhave samaya’’nti evamādi pāṭho saṅgahito. Ahaṃ bhikkhave ekaṃ samayanti evaṃ pettha padayojanā.
“幸运林”(Subhagavana)这个名称:因为自身具足幸运,所以叫“幸运”;也可以理解为因为拥有美好的吉祥,或者因为拥有美好的欲乐。因为那片林子以吉祥的成就而美好,而且人们在那里渴求美好的欲乐。又因为它被大众所喜爱,所以也是“幸运”。“林”(vana)的意思是“令人生起爱着”,也就是以自己的成就让有情对自己生起爱着。或者,“林”的意思是“它乞求”,就好像以自己的成就向有情乞求说:“请来享用我。”它既是幸运,又是林,所以叫“幸运林”,也就是在那片幸运林中。义注里则以“何必用此详细铺陈”而直接说“在名为如此的林中”。当然,娑罗树也可以叫“sāla”,任何树乃至林中最高大的林王树也都可以这么叫。但这里特指最后那种,所以说“在林王树下”。“以根除的方式”,就是以断除随眠的方式。巴利
Subhagavaneti subhagattā subhagaṃ, sundarasirikattā , sundarakāmattā vāti attho. Subhagañhi taṃ sirisampattiyā, sundare cettha kāme manussā patthenti. Bahujanakantatāyapi taṃ subhagaṃ. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attasampattiyā attani sinehaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vanute iti vā vanaṃ, attasampattiyā eva ‘‘maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti satte yācati viyāti attho. Subhagañca taṃ vanañcāti subhagavanaṃ, tasmiṃ subhagavane.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana kiṃ iminā papañcenāti ‘‘evaṃ nāmake vane’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ sālarukkhopi ‘‘sālo’’ti vuccati, yo koci rukkhopi vanappati jeṭṭhakarukkhopi. Idha pana pacchimo eva adhippetoti āha ‘‘vanappatijeṭṭhakassa mūle’’ti. Mūlasamugghātavasenāti anusayasamucchindanavasena.
不离开:因为法性不可动摇,所以不抛弃、不舍弃。所谓“不热恼任何有情,所以叫无热”,这是依照在那些天众当中这个名称已经通行的用法而说的;否则,一切净居天都不热恼任何有情,那就都该叫无热了。“不离开”等词源解释,道理也是这样。美好所见:就是可爱、可看,这是它的意思,所以说“美貌”等。他们被看见是美好的,意思是:用眼看见他们、用识看见他们,都是美好的。所有这些天众,在五蕴有中最为殊胜,因为在这之上再没有更超胜的了。巴利
Na vihāyantīti akuppadhammatāya na vijahanti. ‘‘Na kañci sattaṃ tapantīti atappā’’ti idaṃ tesu tassā samaññāya niruḷhatāya vuttaṃ, aññathā sabbepi suddhāvāsā na kañci sattaṃ tapantīti atappā nāma siyuṃ. ‘‘Na vihāyantī’’tiādinibbacanesupi eseva nayo. Sundaradassanāti dassanīyāti ayamatthoti āha ‘‘abhirūpā’’tiādi. Sundarametesaṃ dassananti sobhanametesaṃ cakkhunā dassanaṃ, viññāṇena dassanaṃ pīti attho. Sabbe heva…pe… jeṭṭhā pañcavokārabhave tato visiṭṭhānaṃ abhāvato.
“依七位佛陀”是指依七位正自觉者的事迹。由于是一位受诸无烦天所祈请的无烦梵天所说,所以就说成是全体无烦天所说的,因此经文说“同样,由无烦天们”。其余诸天神也是同样的道理。所以世尊说:“天神这样对我说。”至于经文中说的“数百位天神”,那全都是就后来那些在自己的教法中证得殊胜成就、往生到那里者而言而说的。这里有两种连贯:法界句的连贯和天神启示句的连贯。“归结”就是总结。其中,凡是义理上没有详细分释的地方,都很容易理解。巴利
Sattannaṃ buddhānaṃ vasenāti sattannaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ apadānavasena. Avihehi ajjhiṭṭhena ekena avihābrahmunā kathitā tehi sabbehi kathitā nāma hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā avihehī’’ti. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘devatā maṃ etadavocu’’nti. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anekāni devatāsatānī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ pacchā attano sāsane visesaṃ adhigantvā tattha uppannānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Anusandhidvayampīti dhammadhātupadānusandhi, devatārocanapadānusandhīti duvidhaṃ anusandhiṃ. Niyyātentoti nigamento. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.